Study Flashcards for SF exam

1
Q

Picklists

A
  • Menus that expand to give users choices
  • Helps simplify data entry and standardize values
  • These guide users to the values they need and make data entry quick
  • Can ONLY select one value at a time
  • NOT ideal for long entries, or unique values
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
2
Q

2 Parts of a Picklist

A
  1. ) Field

2. ) Value Set

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
3
Q

Picklist Field

A
  • Defines the type of picklist

- Ex: Can users select more than one value?

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
4
Q

Picklist Value Set

A

Defines the choices a user sees, their order and the default value, and other settings

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
5
Q

3 Types of Picklists

A
  1. ) Standard
  2. ) Custom
  3. ) Custom Multi-Select
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
6
Q

Standard Picklists

A
  • Picklists that are included in my Salesforce org before any customization
  • Included for the common fields I likely want on standard objects that come with my org
  • Sometimes shares a standard value set
  • With this type of picklist, I can:
    1. ) Add/Remove these from Page Layouts
    2. ) Set a Default Value
    3. ) Can add Values via Apps or API
  • Examples include the Lead Source ________ on the Lead object
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
7
Q

Custom Picklists

A
  • Picklists that I create from scratch
  • I can add my own values and configure this type of picklist’s behavior
  • The following can be done with this type of picklist:
    1. ) Add/Remove from Page Layouts
    2. ) Delete from my Org
    3. ) Set a Default Value
    4. ) Use a Formula for a Default Value
    5. ) Can add Values via Apps or API
    6. ) Can be Restricted
    7. ) Can be a Dependent Picklist
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
8
Q

Custom Multi-Select Picklists

A
  • I should select this option if I want my users to select more than one value from the ________
  • When a user picks more than one value, the selected values show in the field, separated by a semicolon
  • Ex: Gingerbread;Strawberry;Chocolate
  • The following can be done with this type of picklist:
    1. ) Add/Remove from Page Layouts
    2. ) Delete from my Org
    3. ) Set a Default Value
    4. ) Use a Formula for a Default Value
    5. ) Can select Multiple Values
    6. ) Can add Values via Apps or API
    7. ) Can be Restricted
    8. ) Can be a Dependent Picklist
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
9
Q

2 Picklist Properties

A
  1. ) Restricted

2. ) Dependent or Controlling

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
10
Q

Restricted Picklists

A
  • Keeps users from adding new values (either through the API or other apps)
  • This restriction is useful for keeping my data consistent
  • Ex: Imagine someone working in an app that loads data into my picklist and entering a typo into the list (for example, Vamilla)
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
11
Q

Dependent (or Controlling) Picklists

A
  • Filters values for one picklist based on a selection from another picklist or a checkbox (the ‘controlling’ value) on the same record
  • Ex: Say my bakery has a hundred different kinds of cookies, and I want to guide customers with gluten or nut allergies to cookies that don’t have gluten or nuts. I should create this type of picklist for preferences to select “all” , “gluten-free” or “nut-free”. Then, I should set the cookie flavor picklist as this type of picklist of the preference picklist. When someone selects “gluten-free” the cookie flavor picklist shows only the gluten-free flavors
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
12
Q

Global Value Set

A

A custom set of values I create to share with more than one picklist field

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
13
Q

Assignment Rules

A
  • A numbered set of distribution rules that determine which owner a Lead record should be assigned (either a specific user or to a Salesforce Queue)
  • These are generally used at the point in time when a Lead is created (typically by Web-to-lead or an integrated marketing automation platform like Pardot, Marketo, HubSpot)
  • However, they also could be called again later on an existing Lead (by a user), or by a tool like Data Loader
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
14
Q

Standard Objects

A
  • Objects that are included in Salesforce
  • Examples of these types of objects are:
    1. ) Account
    2. ) Account History
    3. ) Case
    4. ) Contact
    5. ) User
    6. ) Asset
    7. ) Domain
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
15
Q

Account

A
  • Standard object which represents an individual account, which is an org or person involved in the business like customers, competitors, partners, etc.
  • This object should be used to query and manage accounts in my org
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
16
Q

Account History

A
  • Standard object which represents the history of changes to the values in the fields of an account
  • This standard object should be used to identify changes to an account
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
17
Q

Case

A
  • Standard object which represents a case, which is a customer issue or problem
  • This standard object should be used to manage cases for my org
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
18
Q

Contact

A
  • Standard object which represents a contact, which is an individual associated with an account
  • This standard object should be used to manage individuals who are associated with an Account in an org
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
19
Q

User

A
  • Standard object which represents a user in an org
  • This standard object should be used to query information about users and also helps to provide and modify the information concerning the users
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
20
Q

Asset

A
  • Standard object which represents an item of commercial value, such as a product sold by the company or a competitor that a customer has purchased and installed
  • This standard object should be used to track assets previously sold into customer accounts. With asset tracking, a client application can quickly determine which products were previously sold or are currently installed at a specific account
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
21
Q

Domain

A
  • Standard object which is a read-only object that represents a custom Web address assigned to a site in my org
  • This standard object should be used to query the domains that are associated with each website in my org
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
22
Q

Custom Objects

A
  • Objects that I create to store information that’s specific to my org or industry
  • These types of objects contain the following features:
    1. ) Build page layouts to control which fields users can view and edit when entering data for the custom object record
    2. ) Import custom object records
    3. ) Create reports and dashboards to analyze custom object data
    4. ) Create a custom tab for the custom object, to display the object’s data
    5. ) Track tasks and events for custom object records
    6. ) Import custom object records
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
23
Q

Look-up Relationship

A
  • Links 2 objects together
  • Can also link an object with itself
  • Allows me to relate records to each other, creating a parent-child schema
  • Generally, this is done between the different objects (such as Accounts and Contacts), but it can be one object (such as Parent Accounts)
  • Relationship fields allow for users to specify how records affect each other and help with reporting
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
24
Q

Master-Detail Relationship

A
  • Closely links objects together such that the master record controls certain behaviors of the detail and subdetail record
  • For example, I can define a two-object _____________ relationship, such as Account—Expense Report, that extends the relationship to subdetail records, such as Account—Expense Report—Expense Line Item
  • Allows for Roll-up Summary fields to be created
  • This relationship type also affects security in that the Detail (or child) record does not have a record owner. It inherits its visibility from the Master (or parent) record. That can be very beneficial, or limiting, depending on my use case
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
25
Q

Many-to-Many Relationship

A
  • Allows each record of one object to be linked to multiple records from another object and vice versa
  • For example, I create a custom object called Bug that relates to the standard case object such that a bug could be related to multiple cases and a case could also be related to multiple bugs
  • When modeling a many-to-many relationship, I will use a junction object to connect the two objects you want to relate to each other
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
26
Q

Junction Object

A

Term to describe an object that is designed to have two different parent objects (generally with Master-Detail relationships), which forms a many-to-many relationship

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
27
Q

S-Control

A
  • Customized elements that are used to store my program’s code
  • It can also be used to refer to another code outside of my org
  • This element is often utilized to improve the function of an existing Salesforce organization and application
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
28
Q

Field Security

A
  • A setting that lets Salesforce Admins define user restrictions as to who can access specific org data
  • The setting lets the Admin control which user profiles can view, edit, and save information on specific fields
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
29
Q

Role Hierarchy

A
  • Works together with sharing settings to determine the levels of access users have to Salesforce data
  • Users can access the data of all the users directly below them in the hierarchy
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
30
Q

List Views

A
  • Unused tool in the Salesforce toolshed; with these, I can quickly see particular segments of my data
  • Queries I can present to my users to help them review the records that interest them
  • Most often found when they click on a tab in an app, but they could also be displayed in via Lightning Components on other Lightning Pages
  • These can be be filtered how they are needed and display whichever columns are relevant
  • Users can also pin their default List View on each tab
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
31
Q

3 Types of Reports in Salesforce

A
  1. ) Joined
  2. ) Summary
  3. ) Matrix
  4. ) Tabular
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
32
Q

Joined Reports

A
  • Combines two reports that have different report types, within a single view so I can compare data
  • These types of reports appear like one single report so that I can get a more holistic data view
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
33
Q

Summary Reports

A
  • Most commonly used report; great for showing groups of data (ex: If I want to see the number or value of opportunities per account, I would group my report by Account Name) - I can also subgroup fields by dragging them under the initial group
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
34
Q

Matrix Reports

A
  • Very similar to summary reports, but they allow me to group by rows as well as columns to see different totals
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
35
Q

Tabular Reports

A
  • The simplest of reports; suited just to show lines of data and nothing else
  • This type of report is similar to an Excel spreadsheet
  • If I just want to show data without the need to show totals, calculations, or groups of data, then this is the report for me
  • It is also best to use this report type if I am planning to export data
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
36
Q

Sharing Rules

A
  • Can be based on who owns the record or on the values of fields in the record
  • For example, use these to extend sharing access to users in public groups or roles
  • As with role hierarchies, these can NEVER be stricter than my org-wide default settings
  • These are the following types:
    1. ) Force.com Managed Sharing
    2. ) Record Ownership
    3. ) Role Hierarchy
    4. ) Sharing Rules
    5. ) User Managed Sharing, also known as Manual Sharing
    6. ) Apex Managed Sharing
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
37
Q

Roll-Up Summary Field

A
  • Available on the master side of a Master-Detail relationship
  • This allows Admins to aggregate data from related detail records (count them, sum a numeric value on them, etc.) in real time
  • Ability to have these types of fields is the top reason why I would consider a Master-Detail relationship
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
38
Q

Visual Force

A
  • Primarily used back in the Salesforce Classic “era” and based on tag-based markup language, similar to HTML
  • Framework that can be used by developers to create completely custom user interfaces on Salesforce
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
39
Q

Lightning Development

A
  • A modern, componentized UI Framework that uses HTML and Javascript
  • Framework that can be used by developers to create completely custom user interfaces on Salesforce
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
40
Q

Managed Packages

A

Packages that arelocked down from being edited, kind of like apps I install on my smartphone

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
41
Q

Unmanaged Packages

A

Packages that, once installed, I can customize to my liking

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
42
Q

Big Deal Alerts

A
  • Send automated emails to users when an Opportunity reaches or exceeds a certain threshold of Probability and Amount that I determine
  • I’ll select the threshold criteria, choose the sender, add a list of recipients and decide whether or not to alert the Opportunity Owner
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
43
Q

Auto-Response Rules

A
  • Allows me to automatically send e-mail responses to Lead or Case submissions based on the record’s attributes
  • For example, I can send an automatic reply to customers to let them know someone at my org received their inquiry
  • I can create these types of rules for leads captured through a Web-to-Lead form and for cases submitted through one of the following:
    1. ) Self-Service portal
    2. ) Customer Portal
    3. ) Web-to-Case form
    4. ) Email-to-Case message
    5. ) On-Demand Email-to-Case message
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
44
Q

Escalation Rules

A
  • Automatically escalates cases when the case meets the criteria defined in the rule entry - I can create rule entries, which define criteria for escalating a case, and escalation actions, which define what happens when a case escalates
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
45
Q

Data Import Wizard

A
  • Tool which makes it easy to import/update data for many standard Salesforce objects, including Accounts, Contacts, Leads, Solutions, Campaign Members, and Person accounts
  • I can also import/update data for custom objects
  • Does NOT support Opportunities!
  • I can import up to 50,000 records at a time with this tool
  • I can also insert 0 - 50,000 records
  • The following 3 functions can be carried out with this tool:
    1. ) Insert
    2. ) Update
    3. ) Upsert
  • This tool includes the following features:
    1. ) Avoid duplicates by selecting matching criteria such as Email or ID
    2. ) Turn off Workflow Rules and Processes during an import/update/upsert
    3. ) Able to assign a Lead Source
    4. ) Select Lead Assignment Rules
    5. ) Assign Contacts or Leads to a Campaign
    6. ) Can be used by both the Admin and the Users
    7. ) Deduplication CAN be performed with this tool
    8. ) Validation rules are available with this tool
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
46
Q

Insert

A

Data Import Wizard feature which gives me the ability to insert new records into Salesforce

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
47
Q

Update

A

Data Import Wizard feature which enables me to make changes to existing records inside Salesforce

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
48
Q

Upsert

A

Data Import Wizard feature which combines insert and upsert, updates a record if it already exists, or – if not – inserts it

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
49
Q

Data Loader

A
  • Client application tool which has the following 7 functions:
    1. ) Insert
    2. ) Update
    3. ) Upsert
    4. ) Delete
    5. ) Hard Delete
    6. ) Export
    7. ) Export All
  • This tool can be used to work with, import, and update data from ALL standard and custom objects (including Opportunity records)
  • When using this tool to export data, I must select the object and the fields that I would like to export out of my Salesforce org. An SOQL query is created that I can update to add the ‘Where’ clause to filter down the data that I am looking to export
  • This tool can ONLY be used by an Admin
  • Data loads can be scheduled with this tool
  • Can insert between 0 - 5,000,000 records
  • Validation rules can be initiated with this tool
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
50
Q

Page Layouts

A
  • Controls the layout and organization of buttons, fields, s-controls, Visualforce, custom links, and related lists on object record pages
  • They also help determine which fields are visible, read only, and required
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
51
Q

Workflow Rules

A
  • An automation tool in Salesforce that offers time-saving solutions for making different internal processes of a company switch from manual work and for optimizing various procedures
  • These indicate specific criteria to be met in order to trigger automated actions
  • Consists of 2 components:
    1. ) Criteria
    2. ) Actions
  • Will be retired at the end of 2022
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
52
Q

3 Types of evaluation criteria for Workflow Rules in Salesforce

A
  1. ) Created
  2. ) Created & everytime it’s edited
  3. ) Created & everytime its edited to subsequently meet the criteria
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
53
Q

‘Created’

A
  • 1st type of evaluation crtieria for Workflow Rules
  • Runs the rule if the rule criteria is met, ONLY when a record is created
  • This rule runs one time ONLY
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
54
Q

‘Created and Every Time Its Edited’

A
  • 2nd type of evaluation crtieria for Workflow Rules
  • Runs the rule if the criteria is met everytime a record is created and edited
  • With this option, the rule criteria runs repeatedly as long as the rule criteria is met
  • Note: Time-Dependent actions CANNOT be added in a workflow rule with this evaluation criteria
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
55
Q

‘Created and Every Time its Edited to subsequently meet the criteria’

A
  • 3rd type of evaulation criteria for Workflow Rules
  • Runs the rule if the criteria is met:
    1. ) Always when a record is created and meets the criteria
    2. ) Only when a record not meeting the criteria is updated and now it meets the criteria
  • By default, this criteria is selected
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
56
Q

2 Types of Actions for Workflow Rules

A
  1. ) Immediate Actions

2. ) Time-Triggered Actions

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
57
Q

Immediate Actions

A

Actions that are executed IMMEDIATELY when the criteria for a rule is met

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
58
Q

Time-Triggered Actions

A
  • Actions that are executed at a specific time which is specified when creating this type of action
  • In these types of actions, when the date or time comes on which the action needs to be executed, it again verifies that the record is still meeting the criteria or not
  • If yes then it executes the respective action; otherwise the action isn’t executed
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
59
Q

4 Actions that can be specified in a Workflow Rule

A
  1. ) E-mail Alert
  2. ) Field Update
  3. ) Tasks
  4. ) Outbound Messages
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
60
Q

E-mail Alert

A
  • 1st action that can be specified in a Workflow Rule
  • Action which sends automated e-mails using an e-mail template
  • 4 Types:
    1. ) Text
    2. ) HTML with Letterhead
    3. ) Custom HTML
    4. ) Visualforce
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
61
Q

Field Update

A
  • 2nd action that can be specified in a Workflow Rule

- Allows automatic change of a field value on the record that initially triggered the workflow rule

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
62
Q

Tasks

A
  • 3rd action that can be specified in a Workflow Rule
  • This action assigns a ____ to a single user, owner, or a role
  • A notification e-mail can be sent to the assignee when a ____ is automatically assigned
  • These should be assigned to roles if they have only one user assigned to that role
  • If there is more than one user assigned to that role then the ____ automatically gets assigned to the owner of the workflow rule Users who triggered the workflow rule
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
63
Q

Outbound Message

A
  • 4th type that can be specified in a Workflow Rule
  • Sends particular information to a designated endpoint such as an external service
  • These types of messages can be listened to using a SOAP AP
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
64
Q

Triggers

A
  • A segment of Apex code which executes before or after inserting or modifying a Salesforce record based on the condition provided
  • These are used to perform operations based on specific conditions, to modify related records, or restrict certain operations from happening
  • There are different types based on the action going to be performed
  • These are Before Triggers and After Triggers
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
65
Q

Before Triggers

A

These are used to update or validate the value in a record before I save it to my Salesforce database

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
66
Q

After Triggers

A
  • These are used to access the values contained within a record and that value is used to make changes to other records in my Salesforce database
  • These are read-only
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
67
Q

Record Types

A
  • Allow me to have different business processes, picklist values, and page layouts to different users based on profile
  • I might create these for example to differentiate my regular sales deals from my professional services engagements
  • Offering different picklist values for each helps me to configure different business processes, assign page layouts, and picklist values
  • These can be linked to user profiles
  • There can be different page layouts and picklist values based on these
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
68
Q

Trialforce E-mail Branding

A
  • Allows me to modify system-generated emails so that they appear to come from my org rather than from Salesforce
  • This only applies to users who sign up for my application through Trialforce
  • Each Trialforce source organization comes with a standard set of email notifications that are sent to customers
  • For example, customers get an email notification when they first sign up, or when they reset their password
  • I don’t have to rewrite all of these system-generated emails myself; I just need to provide the values for the fields and the system takes care of the rest
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
69
Q

4 Types of Sandboxes

A
  1. ) Developer
  2. ) Developer Pro
  3. ) Partial
  4. ) Full
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
70
Q

Developer Sandbox

A
  • Intended for development and testing in an isolated environment
  • This type of sandbox includes a copy of my production org’s configuration (metadata)
  • Has no data initailly (this type of Sandbox differs in the amount of data it can contain)
  • This type of Sandbox can be refreshed daily
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
71
Q

Developer Pro Sandbox

A
  • Intended for development and testing in an isolated environment and can host larger data sets than a Developer sandbox
  • This type of sandbox includes a copy of my production org’s configuration (metadata)
  • This type of sandbox should be used to handle more development and quality assurance tasks and for integration testing or user training
  • Has no data initailly (this type of Sandbox differs in the amount of data it can contain)
  • This type of sandbox can be refreshed daily
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
72
Q

Partial Sandbox

A
  • Intended to be used as a testing environment
  • This environment includes a copy of my production org’s configuration (metadata) and a sample of my production org’s data as defined by a sandbox template
  • This type of sandbox can be used for quality assurance tasks such as user acceptance testing, integration testing, and training
  • This type of sandbox starts with some or all of your Production data
  • This type of sandbox can be refreshed every 5 days
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
73
Q

Full Sandbox

A
  • Intended to be used as a testing environment
  • Only these types of sandboxes support performance testing, load testing, and staging
  • These types of sandboxes are a replica of my production org, including all data, such as object records and attachments, and metadata
  • The length of the refresh interval makes it difficult to use these types of sandboxes for development
  • It is recommended that I apply a sandbox template so that my sandbox contains only the records that I need for testing or other tasks
  • This type of sandbox starts with some or all of my Production data
  • This type of sandbox refreshes every 29 days
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
74
Q

15 Common Standard Profiles in Salesforce

A
  1. System Administrator
  2. Standard Platform User
  3. Standard Platform One App User
  4. Standard User
  5. Customer Community User
  6. Customer Community Plus User
  7. Partner Community User
  8. Partner User
  9. Solution Manager
  10. Marketing User
  11. Contract Manager
  12. Read-Only
  13. Chatter Moderator User
  14. Minimum Access - Salesforce
  15. Site.com Only User
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
75
Q

7 Points to consider when Scheduling Reports

A
  1. I can’t create schedules for joined reports
  2. My org is limited to no more than 200 scheduled reports. Additional scheduled reports may be available for purchase
  3. Scheduled reports run in the time zone of the user who set up the schedule
  4. The report runs within 30 minutes of the time I select for Preferred Start Time
  5. Scheduling reports is not tracked in the audit trail history
  6. The access level of the running user determines what other users, including portal users, see when they receive the scheduled report run results
  7. I can send reports only to email addresses included on Salesforce user records
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
76
Q

Approval Process

A
  • Automates how records are approved in Salesforce
  • This type of process specifies each step of approval, including from whom to request approval and what to do at each point of the process
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
77
Q

Forecast Type

A
  • A forecast that’s configured to use a specific type of data:
    1. ) Standard Opportunity Fields
    2. ) Opportunity Splits
    3. ) Overlay Splits
    4. ) Custom Opportunity Fields
    5. ) Product Families
    6. ) Territories
  • Each type specifies a measurement: revenue or quantity
  • Territory, schedule date, and product date forecasts are available in Lightning Experience ONLY
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
78
Q

Related Lists

A
  • Single component which shows a list of related records based on one specific object
  • For example, if I’m looking at a contact detail page, I can specify to see the cases related to that contact, without seeing all other types of related records
  • I should use this component on an object page or on a custom page to add specific, related information in context for the page
  • Members can create records from the list and from lookups
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
79
Q

Compact Layout

A
  • Used to display the key fields of a record whenever the minimum required details of the record is needed
  • These types of layouts control which fields users see in the highlights panel at the top of a record
  • It also controls the fields that appear in the expanded lookup card that we see when we hover over a link in record details
  • These types of layouts also control how records display in the Salesforce mobile app
  • I can help my users see what they need on mobile screens to quick recognize the records
  • With these types of layouts, I can highlight whatever my users need to see at a glance when they look at a record
  • There are separate _______ layouts for each object
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
80
Q

Mini Page Layouts

A
  • Defines the hover details that display when when I hover my mouse over a field on an object’s detail page or in the Recent Items section of the sidebar
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
81
Q

Custom Formula Fields

A
  • Read-only
  • NOT visible on record detail pages
  • Are supported on Standard and Custom objects
  • Accessible via the Force.com SOAP API
  • The values are calculated every time they are needed; they are NOT stored
  • Allows me to set dynamic default values for new records
  • Used in validation rules to ensure business requirements are met and data quality is maintained
  • Used to enforce other business rules, including Workflow Rules, Approval Processes, Approval Steps, Assignment Rules, Escalation Rules, Auto-Response Rules
  • MAY reference other formula fields
  • MAY reference fields from child to parent objects
  • NOT searchable
  • Can reference standard fields or custom fields
  • Cannot reference text-area long fields
  • Cannot add multiple records together
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
82
Q

Folder

A
  • A place where I can store Reports, Dashboards, Documents, or E-mail templates
  • These can be public, hidden, or shared, and can be set to read-only or read/write
  • I control who has access to its contents based on roles, permissions, public groups, and license types
  • I can make this available to my entire org, or make it private so that only the owner has access
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
83
Q

Field Sets

A
  • A grouping of fields
  • When this is added to a Visualforce page, developers can loop over its fields and render them
  • Admin can edit or create Field sets for the Org
  • For example, you could have a field set that contains fields describing a user’s first name, middle name, last name, and business title.
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
84
Q

Lookup Filters

A

Administrator settings that restrict the valid values and lookup dialog results for lookup, master-detail, and hierarchical relationship fields

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
85
Q

32 Objects Salesforce supports for Lookup Filters on relationship fields

A
  1. ) Accounts
  2. ) Assets
  3. ) Badges
  4. ) Badges Received
  5. ) Campaigns
  6. ) Cases
  7. ) Contacts
  8. ) Content Folders
  9. ) Contracts
  10. ) Endorsements
  11. ) Entitlements
  12. ) Ideas
  13. ) Leads
  14. ) Opportunities
  15. ) Order Products
  16. ) Orders
  17. ) Products
  18. ) Quotes
  19. ) Service contracts
  20. ) Skill Users
  21. ) Skills
  22. ) Social Personas
  23. ) Solutions
  24. ) Thanks
  25. ) User Provisioning Accounts
  26. ) User Provisioning Logs
  27. ) User Provisioning Requests
  28. ) Users
  29. ) Work Order Line Items
  30. ) Work Orders
  31. ) Zones
  32. ) Custom objects
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
86
Q

7 Things that are saved in File Storage

A
  1. ) File Attachments
  2. ) Files Home
  3. ) Salesforce Content
  4. ) Chatter files (including User photos)
  5. ) Info. in the ‘Documents’ tab
  6. ) The custom ‘File’ field on ‘Knowledge’ articles
  7. ) Site.com assets
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
87
Q

27 things that can be saved in Data storage

A
  1. ) Accounts
  2. ) Article types (format: “[Article Type Name]”)
  3. ) Article type translations (format: “Article Type Name] Version”)
  4. ) Campaigns
  5. ) Campaign Members
  6. ) Cases
  7. ) Case Teams
  8. ) Contacts
  9. ) Contracts
  10. ) Custom objects
  11. ) E-mail messages
  12. ) Events
  13. ) Forecast items
  14. ) Google docs
  15. ) Ideas
  16. ) Leads
  17. ) List E-mails
  18. ) Notes
  19. ) Opportunities
  20. ) Opportunity Splits
  21. ) Orders
  22. ) Quotes
  23. ) Quote Template Rich-Text Data
  24. ) Solutions
  25. ) Tags: Unique Tags
  26. ) Tasks
  27. ) All objects tied to Field Service Lightning Enablement
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
88
Q

12 Situations in which changing the Data Type of an existing field can cause Data Loss

A
  1. ) Changing to or from type Date or Date/Time
  2. ) Changing to Number from any other type
  3. ) Changing to Percent from any other type
  4. ) Changing to Currency from any other type
  5. ) Changing from Checkbox to any other type
  6. ) Changing from Picklist (Multi-Select) to any other type
  7. ) Changing to Picklist (Multi-Select) from any other type
  8. ) Currently defined picklist values are retained when you change a picklist to a multi-select picklist. If records contain values that aren’t in the picklist definition, those values are deleted from those records when the data type changes.
  9. ) Changing from Auto Number to any other type
  10. ) Changing to Auto Number from any type except Text
  11. ) Changing from Text to Picklist
  12. ) Changing from Text Area (Long) to any type except Email, Phone, Text, Text Area, or URL
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
89
Q

5 Current Salesforce Editions

A
  1. ) Essentials
  2. ) Professional
  3. ) Enterprise
  4. ) Unlimited
  5. ) Developer
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
90
Q

Essentials Edition

A
  • Designed for small businesses that want to get started with a CRM system quickly
  • It includes intuitive walkthroughs and a setup assistant to get started, an easy-to-use UI, and administration tools to customize your deployment as I grow
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
91
Q

Professional Edition

A
  • Designed for businesses requiring full-featured CRM functionality
  • It includes straightforward and easy-to-use customization, integration, and administration tools to facilitate any small to midsize deployment
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
92
Q

Enterprise Edition

A
  • Meets the needs of large and complex businesses
  • It gives me advanced customization and administration tools, in addition to all the functionality available in this Edition, that can support large-scale deployments
  • Thid Edition also includes access to Salesforce APIs, so I can easily integrate with back-office systems
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
93
Q

Unlimited Edition

A
  • Maximizes my success and extends it across the entire enterprise through the Lightning Platform
  • It gives me new levels of platform flexibility for managing and sharing all your information on demand
  • Includes all Enterprise Edition functionality, Premier Support, full mobile access, unlimited custom apps, increased storage limits, and other features
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
94
Q

Developer Edition

A
  • Provides access to the Lightning Platform and APIs
  • It lets developers extend Salesforce, integrate with other applications, and develop new tools and applications
  • This Edition also provides access to many of the features available in Enterprise Edition
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
95
Q

Running User

A

The user who determines the security settings for which the data in the dashboard will be displayed

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
96
Q

Visibility of information (High to Low)

A
  1. ) Org-Wide Defaults
  2. ) Role Hierarchy
  3. ) Sharing Rules
  4. ) Manual Sharing
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
97
Q

Service Console

A
  • The centralized interface in the Salesforce Service Cloud
  • This is an application devoted to customer service, support and customer experience
  • With this, agents can view all relevant customer information related to a customer case, or customer support incident
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
98
Q

Sales Console

A

A standard Salesforce Lightning app that gives me all my Sales tools at my fingertips to prospect leads, close deals, and manage relationships

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
99
Q

Console Layouts

A

Defines what objects are available to users in the Agent console’s list view frame

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
100
Q

Cloud Scheduler

A
  • Allows Admins to request meetings with customers, and have customers select when they can meet before the meeting is confirmed
  • When this is used to request a meeting, Salesforce.com creates a unique Web page for your meeting that displays the proposed meeting times
  • When invitees visit the page, they select the times that work for them, and send you a reply
  • Salesforce.com tracks all the responses so you can pick the best time to meet when you confirm the meeting.
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
101
Q

Workflow Alert

A

An e-mail generated by a workflow rule or approval process and sent to designated recipients

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
102
Q

Deactivating a User

A
  • Means that a User will not be deleted from the system but will no longer be able to log in to Salesforce and their records can be transferred to another User
  • They cannot be part of workflows or part of any automated processes
  • Deactivating a User will be available user licenses available for use in my org
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
103
Q

Freezing a User

A
  • Means that only stops the User from being able to login
  • In some cases, I can’t immediately deactivate a user (such as when a user is selected in a custom hierarchy field or a user that’s assigned as the sole recipient of a workflow email alert)
  • To prevent users from logging into my org while I perform the steps to deactivate them, I can do this to their account
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
104
Q
Inline editing updates the field when
A. The field is saved/updated
B. When the record is saved/updated
C. When the return key is pressed
D. None of the above
A

A. The field is saved/updated

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
105
Q

If a company opts to use Custom Fiscal Years, they cannot use the standard forecasting option.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
106
Q
Which of the following are not standard objects?
A. Opportunities
B. Solutions
C. Job Applicants
D. Accounts
E. Campaigns
A

C. Job Applicants

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
107
Q
Which of the following are part of the Service Cloud offering?
A. Opportunities
B. Knowledge
C. Entitlements
D. Campaigns
E. Quotes
A

B. Knowledge

C. Entitlements

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
108
Q

Locale settings control how users view date formats, time formats and number formats.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
109
Q

If the company locale is set to US English, all users will have a default locale of US English and this cannot be changed.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False (as the admin, I set the default locale, but my users can set a personal locale if they’re based in a different location)

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
110
Q

If your company’s fiscal year follows the Gregorian calendar, you must use Custom Fiscal Years.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
111
Q

In order to enable multi-currency feature in Salesforce, you must
A. Contact Salesforce.com
B. Check the Enable Multi-currency checkbox in your Chatter profile
C. Operate your business in at least two different countries
D. You cannot enable this feature once you’ve implemented Salesforce

A

B. Check the Enable Multi-currency checkbox in your Chatter profile

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
112
Q
Which feature effectively allows you to "lock" the converted amount on closed opportunities?
A. Locale
B. Company Profile
C. Multi-currency
D. Advanced Currency Management
E. None of the above
A

D. Advanced Currency Management

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
113
Q

User interface settings are global settings and apply to all users of an org.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
114
Q

Which of the following are true about List Views?
A. Save list views for future use.
B. Specify which groups of users have access to the list view.
C. Print list views.
D. Follow records and view related Chatter posts.
E. Export List View data to Excel
F. All of the above

A

A. Save list views for future use.
B. Specify which groups of users have access to the list view.
C. Print list views.
D. Follow records and view related Chatter posts

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
115
Q
A \_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_ defines a collection of settings and permissions that determines what users can see in the user interface, and what they can do.
A. Role
B. Chatter feed
C. Profile
D. Company Profile
A

C. Profile

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
116
Q
Which of the following is not a standard Profile?
A. System Administrator
B. Read only
C. Marketing Director
D. Partner Portal User
E. Standard Administrator
A

C. Marketing Director
D. Partner Portal User
E. Standard Administrator

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
117
Q

A user with a Chatter Free User profile has access to records in Salesforce such as Accounts and Contacts.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False (Users with Chatter Free account can access standard Chatter items such as people, profiles, groups, and files, but they can’t access any Salesforce objects or data like Accounts and Contacts)

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
118
Q

Standard profile permissions cannot be edited.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True (No, we cannot modify “Standard Profiles”. The only way to achieve this is to “Clone” the standard profile, modify the permissions on the cloned profile, and assign the cloned profile to the user)

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
119
Q

System administrators can modify tab settings for custom profiles (Default On, Default Off and Hidden).
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
120
Q

If a user leaves your company, the system administrator should do the following to prevent future access to the Salesforce org.
A. Delete their user record
B. De-activate their user record
C. Delete any accounts or contacts owned by that user
D. None of the above

A

b. De-activate their user record (I cannot delete users from Salesforce; I can remove their license or deactivate them to remove their access to the system)

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
121
Q

An active user record consumes a license.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
122
Q

A system administrator can opt to lock users out of the Salesforce org if they exceed a certain number of failed login attempts.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
123
Q

Where can a system administrator go if they are trying to determine why a user cannot log in to Salesforce? (Choose all that apply.)
A. The Login History related list on the user’s record
B. The user’s profile
C. Manage Users | Login History
D. Call salesforce.com Support

A

A. The Login History related list on the user’s record

C. Manage Users | Login History

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
124
Q
What should a system administrator use to disable an application for a group of users?
A. Sharing Rules
B. Web tabs
C. Page layouts
D. Profiles
E. Roles
A

D. Profiles

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
125
Q
To prevent a user from logging into the Salesforce org outside normal business hours, the System Administrator would do this in:
A. The user record
B. The user's profile record
C. Network settings
D. The role hierarchy
E. None of the above
A

B. The user’s Profile record

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
126
Q

If a user tries to login outside the IP range specified in their profile, the result will be.
A. They will be logged in as normal
B. They will have to reset their password
C. They will be prompted to activate their computer
D. They will be denied access
E. None of the above

A

D. They will be denied access

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
127
Q

When a user logs in the first time to Salesforce, the following takes place (Choose all that apply.)
A. A cookie is placed in the browser
B. Pop ups are automatically disabled
C. Their IP address is added to a trusted list
D. They are prompted to answer a security question

A

A. A cookie is placed in the browser

C. Their IP address is added to a trusted list

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
128
Q

The system administrator needs to prevent telesales teams from logging into Salesforce outside of the office.
How will he/she do this?
A. There is not way to do this
B. Setup | Security Controls | Network Access and specify the team’s range of IP addresses
C. Add the range of IP addresses to the team’s profile(s)
D. Contact salesforce.com as this feature must be enabled

A

C. Add the range of IP addresses to the team’s profile(s)

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
129
Q

Permission sets can replace the need for profiles.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
130
Q

Only 1 permission set can be assigned to a user.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False (Users can have only one profile but, depending on the Salesforce edition, they can have multiple permission sets)

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
131
Q
Used to set the default levels of access for users to records they do not own.
A. Organization Wide Defaults
B. Roles Hierarchy
C. Profiles
D. Sharing Rules
E. Manual Sharing
A

A. Organization Wide Defaults (Answer is A because it says “default levels of access” – which are controlled by OWD only)

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
132
Q

If a user has public read-only access to records [that he/she does not own], the following are true.
A. The user can view the record but not edit it
B. The user can view and delete the record, but not edit it
C. The user can change the owner of the record
D. The user can search for the record
E. The user can report on the record

A

A. The user can view the record but not edit it
D. The user can search for the record
E. The user can report on the record

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
133
Q
If there are any users in the organization that shouldn't have view access to Account records, the OWD for Accounts should be set to
A. Public Read Only
B. Public Read/Write/Transfer
C. Private
D. None of the above
A

C. Private

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
134
Q
In a private sharing model, the following can be used when Role Hierarchy alone isn't sufficient when providing record access to users (Choose all that apply.)
A. Forecasting
B. Sharing rules
C. Manual Sharing
D. Teams (Account, Sales and Case)
E. Apex Triggers
A

B. Sharing Rules

C. Manual Sharing

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
135
Q

Criteria-based sharing rules allow administrators to share records based on field values rather than record ownership.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
136
Q

Public groups can be used to simplify the creation of sharing rules for Administrators.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
137
Q
Public groups can be any combination of other public groups, users, roles and \_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_.
A. Profile
B. Roles & subordinates
C. Managers
D. None of the above
A
B. Roles & subordinates
Depending on the group member types available in your org, public groups can be a combination of:
1.) Individual Users
2.) Roles
3.) Roles and Subordinates
4.) Territories
5.) Territories and Subordinates
6.) Other Public Groups
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
138
Q

Sales reps at AW Computing need assistance from product managers when selling certain products. Product managers do not have access to Opportunities but need to gain access when assisting on a specific deal. How can the system administrator accomplish this?
A. Notify the product manager using opportunity update reminders
B. Use similar opportunities to show opportunities related to the product manager
C. Enable account teams and allow users to add the product manager
D. Enable sales teams and allow users to add the product manager

A

C. Enable account teams and allow users to add the product manager

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
139
Q

Manual sharing allows administrators to grant one-off access to individual records, users cannot grant this access even if they own the record.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
140
Q
Who can manually share records?
A. The record owner
B. The record owner's manager
C. The record owner's manager's manager
D. The system administrator
E. All of the above
F. None of the above
A

E. All of the above

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
141
Q
If Field Level Security prevents a user from viewing the Credit Card field on the Opportunity record, the user will also be prevented from seeing this field (Choose all that apply.)
A. In a related list
B. In search results
C. In reports
D. In list views
E. All of the above
F. None of the above
A

E. All of the above

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
142
Q
The following can be done by a System Admin to a standard field.
A. Change the field label
B. Add help text
C. Add/edit values of a picklist
D. Delete the field
E. All of the above
F. None of the above
A

A. Change the field label
B. Add help text
C. Add/edit values of a picklist

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
143
Q
Use a \_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_ picklist to filter the values of one picklist based on the value of another picklist.
A. Controlling
B. Multi-select
C. Dependent
D. Independent
A

A. Controlling

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
144
Q

A checkbox can be the controlling field to a dependent picklist.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
145
Q

AW Computing needs to track the manufacturer and model for specific computers and laptops. How can the system administrator ensure that manufacturer selected influences the values available for model.
A. Create a multi-select picklist field that includes both manufacturers and models.
B. Create a lookup field from the manufacturer object to the model object
C. Create a manufacturer field as a controlling picklist and the model as a dependent picklist
D. Create a manufacturer field as the dependent picklist and the model as the controlling picklist.

A

C. Create a manufacturer field as a controlling picklist and the model as a dependent picklist

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
146
Q

Lookup fields allow users to select a record from another object during data entry, creating a parent-child relationship.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
147
Q

Which of the following are true about formula fields?
A. They are read-only
B. They will not display on record edit pages
C. They will not display on record detail pages
D. They are not searchable
E. They will not display on reports

A

A. They are read-only

D. They are not searchable

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
148
Q

A cross object formula references fields from parent objects.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
149
Q
Page layouts are assigned to \_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_.
A. Users
B. Profiles
C. Roles
D. Roles & subordinates
A

B. Profiles

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
150
Q
Use \_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_ to filter or segment picklist values based on the user's profile.
A. Record Types
B. User Profiles
C. Role Hierarchy
D. Business Processes
E. Field Level Security
A

A. Record Types

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
151
Q
Which of the following objects support business processes?
A. Cases
B. Opportunities
C. Campaigns
D. Knowledge
A

A. Cases

B. Opportunities

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
152
Q
When creating a sales process, the System Administrator will be modifying/filtering the values of the \_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_ field.
A. Amount
B. Stage
C. Next Steps
D. Status
E. Close Date
A

B. Stage

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
153
Q

The system administrator has been asked to create a way to track Shipments of products to customers. Shipments should be closely tied to the Opportunity record and there may be more than one shipment record per Opportunity and the Opportunity should be required (i.e. Users cannot save a Shipment record without associating it to an Opportunity). The system administrator should create.
A. A cross object formula displaying Opportunity ID on the Shipment record
B. A Master - Detail relationship on the Shipment object to the Opportunity object
C. A lookup relationship on the Opportunity object to the Shipment object
D. A lookup relationship with a lookup filter from Opportunity to Shipment

A

B. A Master - Detail relationship on the Shipment object to the Opportunity object

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
154
Q

In order to create a many-to-many relationship between two objects, a junction object must be created. This junction object will have a Master-Detail relationship to both objects.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
155
Q

To enable Field History Tracking for an object, the system administrator must also add the related list to the page layout.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
156
Q
In order to update records using the Data Loader, what field must be present in the csv file?
A. Owner
B. Salesforce ID
C. Record Owner
D. Object Name
A

B. Salesforce ID

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
157
Q
You will need a security token to access Salesforce via (Choose all that apply.)
A. Import Wizard
B. Data Loader
C. Salesforce for Outlook
D. All of the above
A

B. Data Loader

C. Salesforce for Outlook

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
158
Q

The Data Loader can de-duplicate records during import.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False (Import Wizard can do this)

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
159
Q

In order to import Opportunity records into Salesforce, a system administrator may use the Import Wizard.
A. True
B. False

A
B. False. 
I can’t import the following records via the Data Import Wizard:
1.) Assets
2.) Cases
3.) Campaigns
4.) Contracts
5.) Documents
6.) Opportunities
7.) Products
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
160
Q

What should a system administrator consider before importing a set of records into Salesforce.
A. The import file should include a record owner for each record
B. Validation rules are not triggered when importing data using the import wizard
C. Data should be de-duplicated in the import file prior to import
D. Currency field values will default to the personal currency of the record owner

A

A. The import file should include a record owner for each record
C. Data should be de-duplicated in the import file prior to import

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
161
Q
Which of the following can be used to create a back up of data from Salesforce?
A. Weekly Data Export
B. Data Loader
C. Import Wizard
D. Reports
E. Dashboards
A

A. Weekly Data Export
B. Data Loader
D. Reports

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
162
Q

Deleted records will be stored in the Recycle Bin for up to 15 days.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
163
Q
Which report type provides a simple list of data with no subtotals?
A. Matrix
B. Summary
C. Tabular
D. Custom
E. Standard
A

C. Tabular

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
164
Q
Use Custom Summary Formulas to create calculated summaries on numerical fields in \_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_ and \_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_ reports.
A. Tabular and Summary
B. Custom and Standard
C. Summary and Matrix
D. Matrix and Tabular
A

C. Summary and Matrix
(Tabular: Similar to a spreadsheet)
(Summary = Tabular + Group Rows)
(Matrix = Tabular + Group Rows + Group Columns)

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
165
Q

Which statement about custom summary formulas is true?
A. Reports can be grouped by a custom summary formula result
B. Custom summary formulas can reference a formula field within a report
C. Custom summary formulas can reference another custom summary formula
D. Custom summary formulas can be used in a report built from a custom report type

A

B. Custom summary formulas can reference a formula field within a report
D. Custom summary formulas can be used in a report built from a custom report type
1.) A summary formula can’t reference another summary formula
2.) Nor can a summary formula reference a row-level formula
3.) I can’t group report data by summary formula columns
4.) I can’t filter report data by summary formula columns
5.) I can’t reorder summary formula columns

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
166
Q

The following are true about scheduling and emailing reports:
A. The running user determines whose data is visible on the report.
B. The running user must have access to the folder in which the report is saved.
C. All email recipients must have access to the same folder.
D. The report is emailed within 30 minutes of the Preferred Start Time
E. All of the above

A

E. All of the above

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
167
Q

A Dashboard is a visual representation of data from multiple reports and (Choose all that apply.)
A. Is comprised of up to 20 components
B. Displays data from standard reports
C. Has a running user to determine what data is visible
D. Displays data as of the last time the dashboard was refreshed
E. Always shows up to date data
F. Can be scheduled to be refreshed and emailed automatically

A

A. Is comprised of up to 20 components
C. Has a running user to determine what data is visible
D. Displays data as of the last time the dashboard was refreshed
F. Can be scheduled to be refreshed and emailed automatically

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
168
Q
Users can post a static image of a component to the dashboard feed, a user feed or a group feed, this feature is called
A. Dashboard Component Snapshot
B. The Running User
C. Chatter Groups
D. Dashboard Component
E. Dynamic Dashboards
A

A. Dashboard Component Snapshot

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
169
Q

Dynamic Dashboards allow data to be displayed by the user viewing it, rather than by a specified running user - eliminating the need to create the same dashboard for multiple users.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
170
Q
A Sales VP wishes to view Dashboard data by region within his territory - what feature will allow this?
A. Dynamic Dashboards
B. Dashboard Filters
C. Dashboard Snapshots
D. This is not possible
A

B. Dashboard Filters

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
171
Q

The System Administrator has been asked to ensure an email goes out to Sales Ops when an opportunity is closed notifying them of the closed deal. What evaluation criteria will the system admin use for the workflow rule?
A. When a record is created
B. When a record is created or updated
C. When a record is created/updated and didn’t previously meet the trigger criteria
D. None of the above

A

C. When a record is created/updated and didn’t previously meet the trigger criteria

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
172
Q

The support team has asked the System Administrator to automate the notification of a customer’s support plan ending - they would like for the Customer Support
Rep to receive an email 30 days before the Support Plan Expires (Support Plan Expiration Date is on the Account record). What will the system administrator do?
A. Create a workflow rule with a time-based trigger to fire 30 days before the Support Plan Expiration Date and use an email action to notify the assigned Support Rep
B. Create a workflow rule with an immediate action to email the Support rep but with a due date of 30 days before the Support Expiration Date
C. Create an Apex trigger to fire 30 days before Support Plan Expiration Date and use an email action to notify the assigned Support Rep
D. This cannot be done

A

A. Create a workflow rule with a time-based trigger to fire 30 days before the Support Plan Expiration Date and use an email action to notify the assigned Support Rep

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
173
Q

The system administrator was testing workflow rules and needs to delete pending time-based workflow actions. How can he/she do this?
A. Delete the workflow rule
B. Deactivate the workflow rule
C. Delete the actions in the Time-based Workflow queue
D. Reset passwords for all users of the org
E. None of the above

A

C. Delete the actions in the Time-based Workflow queue

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
174
Q
What feature would a system administrator implement to allow AW Computing's prospects/customers to complete a form on the corporate website and have that data automatically become a lead in Salesforce?
A. Auto Response Rules
B. Assignment Rules
C. Web-to-Lead
D. Escalation Rules
A

C. Web-to-Lead

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
175
Q
When a Lead is converted, an Account, Contact and \_\_\_\_\_\_\_ record are created.
A. Lead
B. Case
C. Campaign
D. Opportunity
A

D. Opportunity

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
176
Q
Queues can be made up of the following
A. Users
B. Public Groups
C. Roles
D. Profiles
E. External Chatter Users
A

A. Users
B. Public Groups
C. Roles

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
177
Q

Assignment rules allow Leads and Cases to be automatically assigned to users and queues based on criteria defined by the system administrator.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
178
Q

The system administrator needs to ensure that all Leads coming from the website are assigned a website lead queue, that all Leads for a recent trade show are assigned to Matt Wilson and all other leads are assigned to Phil Smith. The system administrator will
A. Create 3 assignment rules
B. Create 1 assignment rule with multiple criteria entries
C. Create an assignment rule and 2 workflow rules
D. Use workflow rules to accomplish this

A

B. Create 1 assignment rule with multiple criteria entries (one assignment rule contains multiple rule entries, based-off of which I can assign multiple users in those entries)

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
179
Q

Auto response rules can be used to send an automated yet tailored response to customers based on the information they provide via the Web-to-lead form.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
180
Q

When Chatter is enabled in an org, the following happens (Choose all that apply).
A. The Chatter app is added to the Force.com app menu
B. The Chatter tab is added to all standard apps
C. Accounts, Contacts, Cases, Leads and Opportunities are enabled for Chatter
D. All users are added to the All Chatter group
E. All of the above

A

A. The Chatter app is added to the Force.com app menu
B. The Chatter tab is added to all standard apps
C. Accounts, Contacts, Cases, Leads and Opportunities are enabled for Chatter

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
181
Q
The Chatter Free license gives users the ability to access People, Profiles, Groups and Files as well as (Choose all that apply.)
A. Make posts
B. View comments
C. Upload files
D. Join groups
E. View records
A

A. Make posts
B. View comments
C. Upload files
D. Join groups

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
182
Q

Chatter External license allow users outside the company to join public Chatter groups.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False (Customers can access information and interact with users only in the groups they’re invited to)

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
183
Q
Who can invite Chatter customers into a Chatter group?
A. The system admin
B. Group owner
C. All Chatter users
D. None of the above
A

A. The system admin

B. Group owner

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
184
Q
Folders are used to organize the following (Choose all that apply.)
A. Dashboards
B. Reports
C. Documents
D. Email templates
E. All of the above
F. None of the above
A

E. All of the above

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
185
Q
The \_\_\_\_\_\_\_ determines if a user can read, create and edit Contact records, the \_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_ determines if he can see/edit contact records owned by his subordinates.
A. Role, Profile
B. OWD, Sharing rules
C. Sharing rules, Role Hierarchy
D. Profile, Role
A

D. Profile, Role

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
186
Q

The page layout allows users to see the Next Steps field on an Opportunity record, Field Level Security dictates that the field is hidden, how will the field appear to the user?
A. The field will be hidden from the user
B. The field will be read only
C. The field will be visible and editable to the user
D. None of the above

A

A. The field will be hidden from the user

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
187
Q
Record types specify the following elements.
A. Picklist values
B. Page layouts
C. Business processes
D. All of the above
E. None of the above
A

D. All of the above

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
188
Q
Which objects support business processes?
A. Opportunities
B. Leads
C. Campaigns
D. Accounts
E. Solutions
F. Cases
G. Contacts
A

A. Opportunities
B. Leads
E. Solutions
F. Cases

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
189
Q

Lead assignment rules assign leads to owners and queues based on the criteria the system admin specifies within the rule.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
190
Q
Which of the following are actions triggered by workflow rules?
A. Email
B. Task
C. Field update
D. Record update
E. Record creation
F. Outbound message
G. Time trigger
A

A. Email
B. Task
C. Field update
F. Outbound message
When a record meets all the criteria for a workflow rule, that rule’s actions are executed. Workflow rules can help automate the following types of actions based on your organization’s processes:
1.) Email Alerts: Sends an email to one or more recipients you specify
2.) Tasks: Assigns a new task to a user, role, or record owner
3.) Field Updates: Updates the value of a field on a record
4.) Outbound Messages: Sends a secure, configurable API message (in XML format) to a designated listener

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
191
Q

Will two different users get the same search results on searching for a common keyword?
A. Yes
B. No

A

B. No (that is because not every users have the same access rights, so User A will see what is available/acessible to them compare to User B)

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
192
Q

If a lead is converted without a value in the company field, what happens?
A. A Business Account is created
B. A Person Account is created
C. You will be prompted to decide whether to create a Person or a Business Account
D. Nothing

A

B. A Person Account is created

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
193
Q
An Approval Process begins when a record is:
A. Created
B. Saved
C. Edited
D. Submitted for Approval
A

D. Submitted for Approval

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
194
Q

Time based workflow can be triggered every time a record is created or edited
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
195
Q

When you add a custom object tab, all of the following will be accessible with the object EXCEPT
A. Recent Items
B. Sidebar Search
C. Added to New Link/Create New Object Drop Down
D. Custom Object Reports

A

D. Custom Object Reports

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
196
Q

When you Delete a lead from a campaign, it deletes the lead record itself.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
197
Q
Which of the following SF applications enables organizations to speed and streamline all phases of sales?
A. SF ideas
B. SF content
C. SF Automation
D. SF Customer service and support
A

C. SF Automation

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
198
Q
All of the following objects may have a queue EXCEPT
A. Accounts
B. Cases
C. Leads
D. Custom Objects
A

A. Accounts (I can use Queues for managing cases, leads, tasks, contact requests, orders, service contracts, knowledge articles, and custom objects)

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
199
Q

You can use standard reports when creating Dashboards
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
200
Q

Who can select the “sharing” button on Account and Opportunity records?
A. The Record Owner, System Administrator, and a User shared to the record
B. The Record Owner, a User shared to the record, and any User above the Record Owner in the Role Hierarchy
C. The Record Owner, a User above the Record Owner, and the System Administrator
D. The Record Owner and System Administrator

A

C. The Record Owner, a User above the Record Owner, and the System Administrator

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
201
Q

You are working with a Professional Edition organization. They wish to install the Expense Tracker which requires the use of 4 custom tabs, 3 custom objects, and one custom app. If the company is already using 4 applications, 36 custom objects, and 7 custom tabs, what will happen when they try to install Expense
Tracker?
A. They will not be able to complete the installation process as they have reached the maximum number of custom tabs
B. They will not be able to complete the installation process as they have reached the maximum number of custom objects
C. The installation will succeed
D. The installation will succeed, but only the reports

A

A. They will not be able to complete the installation process as they have reached the maximum number of custom tabs

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
202
Q

Your organization is a US-based company with a default currency of US Dollars. As a sales rep, your personal currency set to British Pounds. You create an opportunity with a currency in British Pounds. The administrator updates the currency conversion rates. Which of the following best describes what happens to the amount of your British-Pound-based opportunity?
A. The overall opportunity amount does not change but the converted amount in a report does.
B. The overall opportunity amount and converted amount in a report changes
C. Only newly created opportunities reflect the change
D. Only historically created opportunities reflect the change

A

A. The overall opportunity amount does not change but the converted amount in a report does

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
203
Q
Custom Links can be used for the following:
A. Launching an External URL
B. Running an S Control
C. Running a report
D. All of the Above
A

D. All of the Above

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
204
Q

It is possible to share a custom object record manually
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
205
Q

You can customize the Opportunity Stage History related list on an Opportunity Page Layout.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False (The Opportunity stage related list on page layout is not customizable. That means we cannot choose what fields will be displayed with in the related list or the order of records with in it)

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
206
Q
It is possible to view a forecast based on all of the following EXCEPT:
A. Territory
B. Product Family
C. Date Range
D. Sales Team
A

D. Sales Team

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
207
Q

Which of the following does a Profile control?
A. Username and Password
B. Role level access
C. Read, Create, Edit, and Delete permissions
D. Sharing rules

A

C. Read, Create, Edit, and Delete permissions

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
208
Q

If a lead, with a single marketing campaign is converted, the campaign information will map to the newly created contact and opportunity record automatically
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
209
Q

Related Lists display the many sides of a one-to-many relationship
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
210
Q

Case Assignment Rules are based on elapsed time
A. True
B. False

A

B. False (Case Assignment rules are NOT based on elapsed time; Escalation Rules ARE based on elapsed time)

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
211
Q

Which of the following are true about Master/Detail relationship in custom objects?
A. Sharing is inherited from parent
B. Child needs to be manually deleted when parent is deleted
C. Only child fields are available for reporting
D. Lookup field child is required

A

A. Sharing is inherited from parent

D. Lookup field child is required

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
212
Q

When test driving an application on the AppExchange Directory, it is not possible to view the S-Control configurations of that application
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
213
Q

Validation rules may evaluate an opportunity line item against the opportunity it’s associated with
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
214
Q
An S-Control may be all of the following EXCEPT:
A. HTML
B. XML
C. URL
D. Snippet
A

B. XML

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
215
Q

If a profile does not have access to an application, that profile will also not have access to the tabs and objects of that application
A. True
B. False

A

B. False (An app is just a bundle of tabs and objects meant to make it easier to work with. However, my app access does not control the individual access to the objects involved)

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
216
Q
Which type of field cannot have universal requiredness?
A. Lookup
B. Text
C. Email
D. Number
A

A. Lookup

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
217
Q

Custom Web Tab may consist of all the following EXCEPT:
A. A URL
B. A URL that passes salesforce.com data like an organization’s name
C. An S-Control
D. An S-Control snippet

A

B. A URL that passes salesforce.com data like an organization’s name

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
218
Q

Custom lead fields can be mapped to which sets of objects in salesforce.com?
A. Account, Contact, Opportunity, or Campaigns
B. Account, Contact, or Opportunity
C. Account or Contact Only
D. Contact or Opportunity Only

A

B. Account, Contact, or Opportunity

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
219
Q
You can map a custom lead field to only one of the following objects at a single instance? (Choose all that apply.)
A. Account
B. Contacts
C. Cases
D. Opportunities
A

A. Account
B. Contacts
D. Opportunities

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
220
Q

Once a field is hidden from a Profile using ‘Field Level Security’, a User associated to that Profile can still see the field using the following:
A. List Views
B. Reports
C. Search
D. None of the above, the user cannot see the field at all

A

D. None of the above, the user cannot see the field at all

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
221
Q

Is it possible to relate a person account to a contact on a business account.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False (It is NOT possible to relate a person account to a contact on a business account)

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
222
Q

How is the expected revenue calculated in the opportunity?
A. Amount multiplied by the total price of all opportunity line items
B. The sales price on any line item times the probability of the opportunity
C. Opportunity Amount multiplied by the probability
D. Amount multiplied by the discount percent

A

C. Opportunity Amount multiplied by the probability

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
223
Q

A custom lookup field can be added to create a relationship between a standard object and which of the following objects?
A. Users and Custom Objects
B. Leads, Accounts, Contacts and Custom Objects
C. Users, Custom Objects and Campaigns
D. Custom Objects, Contract and Campaigns

A

A. Users and Custom Objects

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
224
Q

Assume the Organization Wide default sharing is set to private for all objects and no sharing rules have been created. You have two users in the Sales Rep Role, can they view each other’s data?
A. Yes
B. No

A

B. No (with Private for all Objects and no Sharing Settings (Rules), viewing records I do not own is not possible unless some other mechanism (Teams) is included)

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
225
Q

Based solely on the role hierarchy a manager can do all of the following EXCEPT:
A. View, edit, delete, and transfer his/her and his/her subordinates records
B. Extend sharing on both his/her and his/her subordinate’s records
C. View all folders his/her Subordinate has access to, i.e., Reports, Documents, and Email Templates
D. View records his subordinate does not own but can view

A

C. View all folders his/her Subordinate has access to, i.e., Reports, Documents, and Email Templates (after I share a folder with a role, it’s visible to ONLY users in that role, NOT to superior roles in the hierarchy)

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
226
Q

When you delete a parent record, you will also delete the child record if that child record has a lookup relationship to the deleted record:
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
227
Q

Which action must be taken to view contacts associated with a case in the console?
A. The related lists of the case page layout must be modified
B. The custom links of the case page layout must be modified
C. The related object of the case page layout must be modified
D. The mini page layout of the case page layout must be modified

A

D. The mini page layout of the case page layout must be modified

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
228
Q

All fields on the Approval page layout are available to view on the Approval History related list
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
229
Q
The formula editor may be used all of the following places EXCEPT:
A. S-Control
B. Formula Field
C. Default Values on Standard Fields
D. Workflow Field Updates
A

C. Default Values on Standard Fields

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
230
Q
All of the following are types of AppExchange Applications EXCEPT:
A. Composite
B. Client
C. Provisional
D. Native
A

C. Provisional

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
231
Q

All of the following are true about Default Sales Teams EXCEPT:
A. Default Sales Teams are configured on a user record
B. Default Sales Teams may be added manually to an opportunity record
C. Default Sales Teams may be added automatically to an opportunity
D. Default Sales Teams may be added manually to an account record

A

D. Default Sales Teams may be added manually to an account record

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
232
Q

Users can be deleted from salesforce.com
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
233
Q

When configuring Customizable Forecasting, you can set which of the following Forecast Dates for determining which opportunities contribute to the forecast?
A. Opportunity Close Date Only
B. Product Date Only
C. Schedule Date Only
D. Commit Date
E. Opportunity Close Date, Product Date, Schedule Date

A

A. Opportunity Close Date Only

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
234
Q
Select the best component to use if you want to list the top five sales performers on a dashboard.
A. Chart
B. Table
C. Metric
D. Gauge
A

B. Table

  • Use a chart when I want to show data graphically. I can choose from a variety of chart types
  • Use a table to show a set of report data in column form
  • Use a metric when I have one key value to display
  • Use a gauge when I have a single value that I want to show within a range of custom values
  • Enter metric labels directly on components by clicking the empty text field next to the grand total
  • Metric components placed directly above and below each other in a dashboard column are displayed together as a single component
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
235
Q
Custom formula fields are recalculated:
A. Nightly
B. Every twenty minutes
C. Once per user session
D. Each time a user views the record
A

D. Each time a user views the record

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
236
Q

What are the opportunity defaults when converting a lead to an opportunity?
A. Stage Defaults to first option in the picklist, close date defaults to the last day in the quarter, and the amount defaults to blank
B. Stage defaults to first option in the picklist, close date defaults to 3 months from conversion date, and amount defaults to blank
C. User defines amount, close date, and stage upon conversion
D. None of the above

A

A. Stage Defaults to first option in the picklist, close date defaults to the last day in the quarter, and the amount defaults to blank

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
237
Q
How many other fields may a custom lead field be mapped to when converting a lead?
A. One custom field
B. Two custom fields
C. Three custom fields
D. Custom lead fields cannot be mapped
A

C. Three custom fields (In Lightning Experience, a custom lead field can map to Account, Contact, and Opportunity fields at the same time)

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
238
Q

Folders are used to manage:
A. Either Reports, Price Books, Documents. or Email templates
B. Either Reports, Dashboards, Documents, or Products
C. Either Reports, Dashboards, Documents, or Email templates
D. Either Reports, Dashboards, Documents, or Other Folders

A

C. Either Reports, Dashboards, Documents, or Email templates

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
239
Q

Is it possible for a Page layout to be associated with a Record Type.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True (Page layouts and record types are used in conjunction with one another to customize the views of different types of users. While page layouts control what is shown on the page, record types are used to differentiate between different categories of users and segment user groups for object page customization)

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
240
Q

Which of the following object relationships is NOT allowed?
A. Standard object as the “master” and a custom object as the detail
B. Custom object as the “master” and a standard object as the detail
C. Custom object as a lookup to a standard object
D. Custom object as a lookup to a custom object

A

B. Custom object as the “master” and a standard object as the detail
(I can define master-detail relationships between custom objects or between a custom object and a standard object. However, the standard object cannot be on the detail side of a relationship with a custom object. In addition, I cannot create a master-detail relationship in which the User or Lead objects are the master)

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
241
Q
All of the following actions may take place on a Workflow Rule EXCEPT:
A. Outbound API message
B. Update Field
C. Create a Task
D. Create an Event
A

D. Create an Event

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
242
Q
All of the following may be used when updating a record using the AppExchange Data Loader EXCEPT:
A. External Id
B. Parent External Id
C. Record Id
D. Record Number
A

D. Record Number

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
243
Q

Record Type may determine the default value of a picklist field.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
244
Q

With Client Management enabled, when a lead is converted without a value in the company field, it becomes a person account.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
245
Q

The Campaign ROI Analysis Report uses which of the following calculations to determine the ROI percentage for a campaign?
A. Total Amount of Opportunities / Expected Revenue
B. Amount of Won Opportunities / Budgeted Cost
C. Expected Revenue / Budgeted Cost
D. (Amount of Won Opportunities minus Actual Cost) / Actual Cost

A

D. (Amount of Won Opportunities minus Actual Cost) / Actual Cost

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
246
Q

The difference between an opportunity record type and a sales process is:
A. The sales process controls the stage field, the record type controls all other picklist fields
B. The record type controls the stage field, the sales process controls all other picklist fields
C. The record type controls the picklist fields
D. The sales process controls all picklist fields

A

A. The sales process controls the stage field, the record type controls all other picklist fields

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
247
Q
An S-Control may be used in all of the following ways EXCEPT:
A. Dashboard Component
B. Custom Button
C. Custom Link
D. Import Wizard
A

D. Import Wizard

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
248
Q

Assets are related to which of the following sets of objects?
A. Opportunities, Products, Cases, Accounts, and Contacts
B. Products, Cases, Accounts, and Contacts
C. Cases, Contracts, Accounts, and Contacts
D. Opportunities, Cases, and Accounts
E. Opportunity Line Items, Cases, Accounts, and Contacts

A

B. Products, Cases, Accounts, and Contacts

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
249
Q
All of the following may be uploaded to the AppExchange Directory EXCEPT:
A. Custom Tabs
B. Custom Fields on Custom Objects
C. Custom Fields on Standard Objects
D. Custom Assignment Rules
A

C. Custom Fields on Standard Objects

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
250
Q

Which objects can be customized for history tracking?
A. Solutions, Cases, Leads and Opportunities
B. Cases, Leads, Solutions, Contracts, and Custom Objects
C. Campaigns, Contracts, Custom Objects, and Solutions
D. Opportunities, Leads, and Contracts

A

B. Cases, Leads, Solutions, Contracts, and Custom Objects

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
251
Q

Fields hidden using Field Level Security are subject to Data Validation Rules.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
252
Q

You have Read Only access to an account, can you add a task or event to the account?
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
253
Q
Custom Formula fields do Not support which of the following functional expression?
A. Adding multiple records together
B. If/then/else conditional statements
C. Clickable image buttons
D. Combine text strings together
A

C. Clickable image buttons

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
254
Q

A service portal user may close their cases using Suggested Solutions in the self service portal.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
255
Q

Default values are available for standard text fields
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
256
Q

All of the following are true about Opportunity Pipeline and Forecast reporting EXCEPT:
A. Pipeline reports may include omitted opportunities from the forecast
B. Forecasts may be overridden
C. Pipeline reports may be overridden
D. Opportunity stages may be used to determine the forecast category of an opportunity

A

A. Pipeline reports may include omitted opportunities from the forecast

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
257
Q
Recent Item and Look up Hover Views use the:
A. Sidebar
B. Edit Page
C. List Views
D. Related Lists
A

A. Sidebar

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
258
Q
Name one place where inline Editing is not currently possible. (Choose 2 answers)
A. List Views
B. Related Lists
C. Edit Page
D. All of the above
A

B. Related Lists

C. Edit Page

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
259
Q

Searches and Filters that take a long time may be cancelled.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
260
Q
What information does the Company Profile Hold?
A. Language, Locale, and Time Zone
B. Licenses, Storage and Used Space
C. Fiscal Year
D. Forecasting
E. None of the above
A

A. Language, Locale, and Time Zone
B. Licenses, Storage and Used Space
C. Fiscal Year

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
261
Q

What information may be updated on the Company Profile?
A. Language, Locale, and Time Zone
B. Fiscal Year
C. Primary Contact and Address Information
D. Forecasting
E. All of the above

A

A. Language, Locale, and Time Zone
B. Fiscal Year
C. Primary Contact and Address Information

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
262
Q

Standard Fiscal Years are periods that follow Gregorian calendar, but can start on the first day of any month of the year.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
263
Q

Custom Fiscal years are for companies that break down their fiscal years, quarters, and weeks in to custom fiscal periods based on their financial planning requirements.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
264
Q

Forecasting can be used with Custom Fiscal Years.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
265
Q

Customizable Forecasting must be enabled for use with Custom Fiscal years.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
266
Q
Where are active currencies located?
A. Security Control
B. User record (Personal Setup)
C. Company Profile
D. None of the above
A

B. User record (Personal Setup)

C. Company Profile

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
267
Q
All the following are Main Setup areas in Salesforce.com EXCEPT?
A. Personal Setup
B. App Setup
C. Data Setup
D. Administration Setup
A

A. Personal Setup

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
268
Q
What does a Profile Control?
A. Access to Application
B. Record Type Access
C. Permissions
D. Data Visibility
E. Hours of IP Address
A

A. Access to Application
B. Record Type Access
C. Permissions
D. Data Visibility

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
269
Q
When are Formula Fields recalculated?
A. Calculated automatically
B. Every 15 Minutes
C. Nightly
D. After Edits / Save
A

A. Calculated automatically

D. After Edits / Save

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
270
Q
Which objects have business processes?
A. Lead
B. Opportunity
C. Case
D. Account / Contact
E. Solutions
A

A. Lead
B. Opportunity
C. Case
E. Solutions

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
271
Q
How many fields (columns) can be displayed on a Customizable Related List?
A. 50
B. 10
C. 25
D. 100
A

B. 10

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
272
Q

A check box can be a controlling field in a field dependency.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
273
Q

You can use a Custom Lookup field to create a relationship between an opportunity and a contact.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
274
Q
What determines a unique User Record?
A. Username
B. Standard Profile
C. Custom Profile
D. User Role
A

A. Username

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
275
Q

It is possible for a User to own a record and not see it if they don’t have the Read Permission to the Object.
A. True
B. False

A

B.False

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
276
Q

What can a Task do that an Email Alert Cannot do? Choose 2 answers.
A. Tasks allow you to track the specific actions you plan to perform or have performed
B. Email Alerts cannot track specific actions.
C. Email Alerts allow you to track the specific actions you plan to perform or have performed
D. Tasks cannot track specific actions

A

A. Tasks allow you to track the specific actions you plan to perform or have performed
B. Email Alerts cannot track specific actions.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
277
Q

What do you need to specify when you schedule a report?
A. You need user with Marketing Profile to Schedule Reports
B. You need user permission to Schedule Reports
C. You need user to have a Manager Role
D. Click Run Report and choose Schedule Future Runs… from the drop-down button.

A

D. Click Run Report and choose Schedule Future Runs… from the drop-down button.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
278
Q
In order to Enable Territory Management you should have:
A. Standard Profile
B. Customizable Forecasting
C. Enable Forecasting
D. All of the above
A

B. Customizable Forecasting

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
279
Q

What is a Managed Package?
A. A managed package is a collection of application components that are posted as a unit on AppExchange
B. They differ from unmanaged packages in that some components are locked, allowing the managed package to be upgraded later.
C. Allows the system Administrator to modify the application
D. Managed packages do not include locked components and cannot be upgraded

A

A. A managed package is a collection of application components that are posted as a unit on AppExchange
B. They differ from unmanaged packages in that some components are locked, allowing the managed package to be upgraded later.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
280
Q
Where will a Campaign associated with a Lead be visible? Choose 2 answers
A. Campaign Related List
B. Campaign History Report
C. Lead History Report
D. Opportunity Related List
A

B. Campaign History Report

C. Lead History Report

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
281
Q
What needs to be specified to schedule a Report?
A. Objects
B. Date Range
C. Location
D. Frequency
A

B. Date Range

D. Frequency

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
282
Q

Which of the following does Salesforce CRM provide for restricting login access to the application? Choose 3 answers
A. Profile-based IP restrictions
B. Organization-wide IP restrictions
C. Profile-based login hour restrictions
D. Organization-wide login hour restrictions

A

A. Profile-based IP restrictions

C. Profile-based login hour restrictions

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
283
Q
Workflow Rules Consist of the following components:
A. Workflow Task
B. Workflow Outbound Message
C. Workflow Field Updates
D. Workflow Actions
E. Workflow Email Alerts
A
A. Workflow Task
B. Workflow Outbound Message
C. Workflow Field Updates
D. Workflow Actions
E. Workflow Email Alerts
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
284
Q

Are Tags searchable from standard Search component?
A. Yes
B. No

A

A. Yes

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
285
Q
Recent Items use the?
A. Edit Page layout
B. Detail Page layout
C. Sidebar
D. Related List
A

C. Sidebar

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
286
Q
\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_ are words or short phrases that users can associate with most Salesforce.com records to describe and organize their data in a personalized way.
A. Views
B. Tags
C. Dashboards
D. Home Pagelayout
E. Apps
A

B. Tags

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
287
Q

What happens when a user clicks on the Create New Apps option present in the List of Apps section?
A. User is taken to a Create new App Page in salesforce.com
B. User is taken to App Exchange
C. User is taken to developer.force.com page
D. None of the above

A

C. User is taken to developer.force.com page

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
288
Q
\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_ are a collection of Force.com components and applications that are made available to other organizations through the AppExchange.
A. Application
B. Object
C. Workflow Rules
D. Packages
E. Visual Force Page
A

D. Packages

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
289
Q

You can set the Tab as a Landing Tab while creating the Tab for the Object.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
290
Q
Which is the new type of Dashboard Chart to make entry in Spring'11 Release?
A. Waterfall Chart
B. Scatter
C. Gauge
D. Metric
E. Organization Chart
A

B. Scatter

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
291
Q

5 dynamic dashboards for Enterprise Edition
10 for Unlimited Edition
3 Developer Edition.
To create, edit, and delete dynamic dashboards: Run Reports AND Manage Dynamic Dashboards
Which of the following events are allowed while writing a trigger on feeds item and feed Comment object?
A. Insert, Update
B. Insert, Delete
C. Insert, Undelete
D. Update, Undelete
E. Insert, Update, Delete

A

B. Insert, Delete

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
292
Q

Can you share the Dashboard components snapshot with everyone in the Company with Chatter?
A. No, we cannot share with the company
B. No, we cannot share with people who do not have access to the dashbaord
C. Yes we can share, but only people having access to dashboard will be able to see the data
D. Yes and everyone will be able to see it regardless of access to dashboard

A

D. Yes and everyone will be able to see it regardless of access to dashboard

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
293
Q

Inline Editing is available in visual force pages?
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
294
Q
Which of the following are new features on Chatter tab?
A. Like
B. @Mention
C. Live Updates
D. All of the Above
A

D. All of the Above

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
295
Q
Which of the following is the new workflow feature of Spring'11 Release?
A. Workflow Rules
B. Flows
C. Field Update
D. Outbound messages
A

B. Flows

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
296
Q

Field Sets works on both Standard as well as Custom Objects.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
297
Q
Which combination of objects is available when creating a custom report type for Chatter reports? (Choose 2 answers)
A. Opportunities, Followers, User Feed
B. Accounts, User Feed, Comments
C. Users, User Feed, Comments
D. Chatter Groups, Members
A

C. Users, User Feed, Comments

D. Chatter Groups, Members

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
298
Q
Which of the following settings directly affects Date fields to display as MM/DD/YYYY?
A. Local
B. Time Zone
C. Language
D. Default Currency
A

A. Locale

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
299
Q
Where do you go to create a List View so that you can see it on the Console, under the Accounts object?
A. Create a list view on the Console
B. Create a list view on Accounts
C. Create a list view on Contacts
D. Create a field on the Console
A

B. Create a list view on Accounts

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
300
Q

Which of the following statements are true about Data Validation?
A. Validation rules apply to all new and updated records for an object.
B. Validation rules can update fields which are not included in a page layout.
C. Validation rules can reference fields which are not included in a page layout.
D. If an error message is not set, a default message will be prompted instead.
E. All of the above.
F. None of the Above.

A

A. Validation rules apply to all new and updated records for an object.
C. Validation rules can reference fields which are not included in a page layout.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
301
Q

Which type(s) of file(s) is accessible through Content?
A. Audio Files.
B. PPT and Video files only.
C. Salesforce CRM Content can include all file types.
D. Files attached to a Chatter profile post.
E. Video Files.
F. Microsoftֲ® PowerPoint presentations.

A

C. Salesforce CRM Content can include all file types.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
302
Q

What is Parallel Approval Routing?
A. When you can mass assign your locked records to users in your same Role
B. The ability to send approval requests to yourself multiple times, so you can approve a record
C. The ability to take back approval requests once you have sent them
D. The ability to send approval requests to multiple approvers in a single step

A

D. The ability to send approval requests to multiple approvers in a single step

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
303
Q
Chatter Desktop is not available in which Salesforce Edition?
A. Free Edition
B. Group
C. Professional
D. Developer
E. Enterprise
F. Contact Manager
A

A. Free Edition

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
304
Q

The account owner, opportunity owners, and case owners may or may not be the same user.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
305
Q

Which file types can you use when exporting reports?
A. You can not export a report. You can only email it.
B. Comma Delimited (.csv)
C. Excel (.xls)
D. PDF

A

B. Comma Delimited (.csv)

C. Excel (.xls)

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
306
Q
\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_ is a Standard profile that has Standard User Permissions and can manage published solutions and solution categories
A. Marketing Profile
B. Contract Manager
C. System Administrator
D. Marketing User
E. Solution Manager
A

E. Solution Manager

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
307
Q

Which of the following are setting options for the User Interface?
A. Enable Collapsible Sections
B. Show Quick Create
C. Show customer Sidebar Components on All Pages
D. Transfer all Open Opportunities
E. Enable Drag-and-drop scheduling on List Views

A

A. Enable Collapsible Sections
B. Show Quick Create
C. Show customer Sidebar Components on All Pages
E. Enable Drag-and-drop scheduling on List Views

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
308
Q

The Report Builder is different from the Report Wizard.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
309
Q

Salesforce.com archives older activities according to which of the following conditions:
A. Closed Events 180 days old
B. Events with a due date greater than 365 days old
C. Open tasks with a due date greater than 365 days old
D. Closed tasks with a due date greater than 365 days old
E. Closed tasks without a due date that were created more than 365 days ago

A

B. Events with a due date greater than 365 days old
D. Closed tasks with a due date greater than 365 days old
E. Closed tasks without a due date that were created more than 365 days ago

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
310
Q
IF(ISPICKVAL(picklist_field)) has the same output as:
A. VAL(picklist_field)
B. CASE(picklist_field)
C. CASE("picklist_field")
D. Picklist_field(VALUE)
A

B. CASE(picklist_field)

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
311
Q

At this click path Setup > App Setup > Customize > Tab Names and Labels > Rename Tabs and Labels you can rename the Tab Names of standard objects.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
312
Q

Is identity confirmation necessary if a user’s IP address is known and browser cookie exists?
A. Yes
B. No

A

B. No

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
313
Q
What is the maximum number of records to be printed in the Printable View of a list view?
A. 2,000
B. 100
C. 1,000
D. 200
A

C. 1,000

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
314
Q

Are custom object reports accessible when you add a custom object tab?
A. Yes
B. No
C. Only if the Object is not related to any other object

A

B. No

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
315
Q
What is not found on a Company Profile?
A. Language, Locale, and Time Zone
B. Profiles
C. Licenses
D. Storage and Used Space
E. Manage Currencies
F. Fiscal Years
A

B. Profiles

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
316
Q

Custom Report Types (CRT) allows you to build a framework from which users can create and customize reports in the report wizard but not in report builder.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
317
Q

A Profile is a collection of settings and permissions that determine what the user can do with records they have access to and how they view those records.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
318
Q
When are data Validation Rules enforced?
A. Upon opening the record
B. Upon closing the record
C. Upon editing a field
D. Upon saving a record
A

D. Upon saving a record

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
319
Q
System Administrators have this permission by default.
A. None of these
B. Report Wizard
C. Report Builder
D. Both Report Wizard and Report builder
A

C. Report Builder

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
320
Q

The Salesforce Console is an example of what?
A. API
B. Third Party Web integration/Application
C. UI
D. Java Script

A

C. UI

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
321
Q

What is the click path to enable Enhance Profile Management?
A. Setup | Customize | User Interface
B. Setup | Manage Users | Profiles
C. Setup | Profiles | Customize

A

A. Setup | Customize | User Interface

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
322
Q

Custom formula fields can reference other custom formula fields including themselves.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
323
Q

You must run the report before you can print or export it because the Printable View and Export details buttons are not available in the report builder.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
324
Q

Which Salesforce editions provide option for customizing profiles?
A. All Editions
B. Unlimited, Developer and Enterprise Editions
C. Professional, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
D. Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
E. All except Group Edition
F. All except Professional Edition

A

B. Unlimited, Developer and Enterprise Editions
C. Professional, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
D. Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
325
Q
How many profiles can load in a single list view with Enhanced Profile Management enabled?
A. 300
B. 500
C. 200
D. 1,000
A

C. 200

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
326
Q

Which is a capability of the new Service Cloud console? (Choose 3 answers)
A. It provides data visibility by combining a list view and related records on one screen.
B. It allows agents to view key record information in the highlights panel.
C. It preserves the context of calls using primary tabs and subtabs.
D. It allows access to data by opening each record in a new window.
E. It allows agents to take notes in an interaction log while in a call.

A

A. It provides data visibility by combining a list view and related records on one screen.
B. It allows agents to view key record information in the highlights panel.
E. It allows agents to take notes in an interaction log while in a call.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
327
Q

User A modifies a record. This modification triggers a workflow rule for immediate execution that includes a field update on the current record. After the execution is complete, what user will be listed under the Last Modified field of this record?
A. User A
B. The designated workflow user
C. The default workflow user
D. The last user to modify the record prior to User A

A

A. User A

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
328
Q
How does Locale settings affect your exported CSV file?
A. It doesn't affect anything.
B. It determines the delimiter.
C. It determines the encoding.
D. It determines the encryption.
A

B. It determines the delimiter

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
329
Q
What are two sources from which cases can be created?
A. Web-to-Lead
B. Web-to-Web
C. Email-to-Case
D. Connect for Outlook
A

C. Email-to-Case

D. Connect for Outlook

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
330
Q

Which report format summarizes data in a grid against horizontal and vertical criteria and provides totals for both rows and columns?
A. Summary
B. Matrix
C. Tabular

A

B. Matrix

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
331
Q

Every profile, including profiles associated with Customer Portal users must have at least one visible app.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
332
Q

Clients do not have to enable Customizable forecasting before they can ask salesforce to activate Territory Management.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
333
Q

What happens when you convert a Lead and an existing account and contact have the same name as the one specified on the lead?
A. A new account and contact will be created with different Salesforce ID.
B. You can choose to update the existing account and contact.
C. The records will automatically update.
D. The conversion will fail.
E. The account and contact will automatically be overwritten

A

B. You can choose to update the existing account and contact.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
334
Q

You can not use the browser’s print function to print reports.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
335
Q
This helps you manage the complete lifecycle of customer service,from logging cases to suggesting and delivering solutions across multiple channels, including
Web self-service and live agent support:
A. Ideas
B. Community
C. Sales Cloud
D. Service Cloud
E. Sales Cloud
F. None of the Above
A

D. Service Cloud

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
336
Q
How many workflow rules can you create per entity?
A. 10
B. 15
C. 20
D. 25
E. 50
A

E. 50

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
337
Q

What is the default report format for new reports created in report builder?
A. Summary
B. Tabular
C. Matrix

A

B. Tabular

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
338
Q
Which of the following is part of the Sales Cloud 2?
A. Accounts and Contacts
B. Cases
C. Marketing and Leads
D. Solutions
E. Content Library
F. Opportunities and Quotes
A

A. Accounts and Contacts
C. Marketing and Leads
E. Content Library
F. Opportunities and Quotes

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
339
Q
Which of the following are standard Salesforce applications?
A. Ideas
B. Campaigns
C. Administration
D. Call Center
E. Sales Center
F. None of the Above
A

F. None of the Above

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
340
Q

What can an administrator customize for the Service Cloud console?
A. Whether the record opens as a primary tab or subtab
B. The fields displayed in the highlights panel
C. The interaction log fields displayed for objects without an Activity History related list
D. Whether the SoftPhone displays in the footer or sidebar
E. The objects displayed in the navigation tab

A

A. Whether the record opens as a primary tab or subtab
B. The fields displayed in the highlights panel
E. The objects displayed in the navigation tab

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
341
Q

Which is a consideration when creating a drill-to-detail dashboard component?
A. The dashboard component type must be a gauge.
B. Drill-to-detail must be enabled on the custom report type.
C. The source report must be stored in the drill-to-detail folder.
D. The source report must be grouped by record name, record owner, or feed post.

A

D. The source report must be grouped by record name, record owner, or feed post.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
342
Q
Which can be accessed by a Chatter Free user?
A. People
B. Content
C. Profiles
D. Groups
E. Files
F. Leads
A

A. People
C. Profiles
D. Groups
E. Files

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
343
Q

This type of relationship links two objects together, but it has no effect on deletion, record ownership, or security, and the lookup relationship field is not required in the page layout.
A. Lookup Relationship
B. Master-Datail Relationship
C. Master-Detail-Sub detail Relationship

A

A. Lookup Relationship

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
344
Q

When you delete a Contact, it’s associated Campaign Member record is deleted as well.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
345
Q
Data Validation rules is not supported in which Salesforce edition?
A. Contact Manager
B. Group
C. Professional
D. Developer
E. Unlimited
F. All Editions are supported
A

F. All Editions are supported

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
346
Q

Identify the true statements about the workflow approval process?
A. When a record is submitted for approval the Admin can edit the record
B. You can forward an email approval request to another email address
C. The approvers delegate can also approve a request
D. Approvers can view an approval request from their home page
E. Approvers can only access an approval page from the application

A

A. When a record is submitted for approval the Admin can edit the record
C. The approvers delegate can also approve a request
D. Approvers can view an approval request from their home page

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
347
Q

Printable View does not Save all the report formatting.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
348
Q
Which data can be synched using the new Salesforce for Outlook?
A. Custom objects
B. Events
C. Leads
D. Contacts
A

B. Events

D. Contacts

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
349
Q

Time-dependent workflow will not work with which type of workflow evaluation criteria?
A. Only when a Record is created
B. Every time a Record is created or edited
C. Every kind of workflow evaluation criteria
D. When a Record is edited and it didn’t previously meet the rule criteria

A

B. Every time a Record is created or edited

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
350
Q

Up to 25 custom lookup fields can be defined per object.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False (40 custom look-up fields can be defined per object)

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
351
Q

Spring ‘11 includes a managed version of Chatter Desktop for enterprise deployments, and administration controls for controlling access to Chatter Desktop in your organization.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
352
Q

Record locking prevents users from editing a record only if they have certain field-level security or sharing settings.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False (Record Locking is a process of preventing users from editing a record regardless of field level security / sharing settings)

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
353
Q

Can a Standard User Profile import members into a campaign?
A. Yes.
B. No.
C. Only if they have “Import Campaign Members” permission checked.
D. Only if they have “Modify All Data” permission checked.

A

B. No

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
354
Q

The record owner is a user or a queue that has control or rights to a particular data record.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
355
Q

Standard reports are visible through the Reports search.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
356
Q

A System Administrator can edit a profile to (Choose 2 answers):
A. Prevent a user from viewing custom tabs
B. Prevent the use of Mass email
C. Deny a user access to other users leads

A

A. Prevent a user from viewing custom tabs

B. Prevent the use of Mass email

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
357
Q
What is a Dashboard made of?
A. Tables
B. Summary Reports
C. Charts
D. Gauges
A

A. Tables
B. Summary Reports
C. Charts
D. Gauges

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
358
Q

What is one advantage of Salesforce CRM?
A. Companies can seamlessly integrate their servers to Salesforce database for faster performance.
B. Companies only need to maintain a compatible browser and a reliable internet connection.
C. In house Servers can be acquired cheaper than normal
D. None of the above
E. All of the above

A

B. Companies only need to maintain a compatible browser and a reliable internet connection.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
359
Q

Mail Merge is available in which Salesforce Editions?
A. All except Professional
B. Professional and Enterprise
C. Professional, Developer and Enterprise
D. Enterprise and Developer only
E. Developer, Enterprise and Unlimited only
F. All editions

A

F. All editions

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
360
Q

If the System Administrator set a user to create only a certain record type, this user’s ability to view other record types is affected.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
361
Q
What is the maximum number of values you can have in a picklist?
A. 500
B. 250
C. 600
D. 1,000
E. 2,000
A

A. 500 (for Multi-Select Picklists)

D. 1,000 (for Custom Picklists)

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
362
Q

When converting a lead, what values are transferred to the opportunity?
A. Amount = Lead Amount
B. Close Date = Today
C. Close Date = Last day in fiscal quarter
D. Stage = First stage in list

A

C. Close Date = Last day in fiscal quarter

D. Stage = First stage in list

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
363
Q
What is the maximum of time triggers per Workflow Rule?
A. 5
B. 10
C. 15
D. 20
A

B. 10

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
364
Q
Salesforce is which of the following (Choose 3 answers):
A. Salesforce Automation
B. Marketing Management
C. Customer Support Management
D. Campaign Management
A

A. Salesforce Automation
B. Marketing Management
C. Customer Support Management

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
365
Q

Which of the following relationships are correct?
A. Lead, Contacts, and Opportunities can be associated to only one Campaign
B. Leads and Contacts can be associated to several Campaigns, but an Opportunity can have only one Campaign
C. Leads and Opportunities can be associated to several campaigns, but Contacts can only have one Campaign

A

B. Leads and Contacts can be associated to several Campaigns, but an Opportunity can have only one Campaign

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
366
Q
A Workflow Approval process may be used for all of the following objects EXCEPT:
A. Opportunity
B. Users
C. Assets
D. Contracts
A

B. Users

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
367
Q
Which of the following features is not available in Professional Edition?
A. Big Deal Alert
B. Workflow
C. Account Sharing Rules
D. Multi-Currency
A

B. Workflow

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
368
Q

The formula editor may be used all of the following places EXCEPT:
A. S-Control
B. Formula Field
C. Default values on Standard Fields

A

C. Default values on Standard Fields

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
369
Q

If you are added to a Sales Team with read/write access you then have the ability to extend sharing on the opportunity to other users.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
370
Q

A Workflow rule can only be triggered when a record is created.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
371
Q
Which of the following fields CAN NOT be a controlling field for Dependent Picklists?
A. Standard Picklist
B. Custom Picklist
C. Custom Multi-Select Picklist
D. Standard Checkbox
E. Custom Checkbox
A

C. Custom Multi-Select Picklist

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
372
Q

When you have exceeded your general storage limit, you can use your complimentary document storage for additional space.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
373
Q

To make a field required, which of the following is used? (Pick the best possible answer)
A. Page Layout
B. Field Level Security
C. Profile
D. Both Page Layout and Field Level Security

A

A. Page Layout

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
374
Q

What type of information can NOT be shown with an S-Control Dashboard component?
A. Combination of two other Dashboard components
B. External feed of data
C. Data Warehouse information
D. Flash representations of data

A

B. External feed of data

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
375
Q

A new list view can be created from within the console
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
376
Q
All of the following are default Account record types- with Client Management EXCEPT:
A. Account Tab Default
B. Business Account Default
C. Person Account Default
D. Partner Account Default
A

D. Partner Account Default

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
377
Q

You must be a user of Salesforce.com in order to Receive an email notification in the case escalation process:
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
378
Q
Which of the following is a standard Profile?
A. Sales User
B. Marketing User
C. Invoice Manager
D. Contract Manager
A

B. Marketing User

D. Contract Manager

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
379
Q
Who may be assigned a workflow task? There are 5 correct answers.
A. A single user
B. Multiple users
C. The Record owner
D. The Record creator
E. An Account team role
F. A Sales Team Role
A
A. A single user
C. The Record owner
D. The Record creator
E. An Account team role
F. A Sales Team Role
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
380
Q
You can create the following Email Template Formats: Choose 4
A. Text
B. Visual Force
C. HTML with Letterhead
D. XML Templates
E. Custom HTML
A

A. Text
B. Visual Force
C. HTML with Letterhead
E. Custom HTML

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
381
Q

Universally required fields always display on edit pages regardless of field-level security.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
382
Q

If you change the data type of any custom field used for lead conversion, that lead field mapping will be deleted.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
383
Q

The automated case user will be listed on the case history for all actions that are system defined, including (Choose 3 answers):
A. When a case is automatically assigned using assignment rules
B. When a case is escalated
C. When a case is created online via Web-to-Case
D. When a Workflow is Triggered

A

A. When a case is automatically assigned using assignment rules
B. When a case is escalated
C. When a case is created online via Web-to-Case

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
384
Q
Organization-Wide Default Sharing Rule for Calendar Access Default is as Follows:
A. Hide Details
B. Hide Details and Add Events
C. Show Details
D. Show Details and Add Events
A

B. Hide Details and Add Events

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
385
Q

Both accounts and users can exist in multiple territories.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
386
Q

What are the following prerequisites I must meet before enabling territory management? Choose 2 answers
A. Your organization must be using customizable forecasting
B. Follow the steps in the Deploying Territory Management Guide to prepare your organization for territory management.
C. You must have the Marketing User Profile
D. You must have the Territory Manager Profile

A

A. Your organization must be using customizable forecasting

B. Follow the steps in the Deploying Territory Management Guide to prepare your organization for territory management.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
387
Q

What is Force.com Platform? Choose 3 answers:
A. Customize, integrate and create enterprise applications as a service and without software.
B. Point-and-click customization tool
C. Customize standard applications provided by Salesforce.com or build their own on-demand applications
D. Modify the applications to meet your needs (No Coding)
E. Group standard and custom tabs into new custom applications

A

A. Customize, integrate and create enterprise applications as a service and without software.
C. Customize standard applications provided by Salesforce.com or build their own on-demand applications
E. Group standard and custom tabs into new custom applications

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
388
Q

What is Force.com Builder? Choose 3 answers:
A. Point-and-click customization tool
B. Group standard and custom tabs into new custom applications
C. Modifies the applications to meet your needs (No Coding)
D. Customize standard applications provided by Salesforce.com or build their own on-demand applications
E. Builds custom Applications

A

A. Point-and-click customization tool
C. Modifies the applications to meet your needs (No Coding)
E. Builds custom Applications

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
389
Q

All of the following are the Custom Business Objects EXCEPT:
A. Use Force.com builder to build your own objects
B. Standard Salesforce.com Objects
C. Capture key, related information that applies to your business
D. Correlate to tables in the database
E. All of the above

A

B. Standard Salesforce.com Objects

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
390
Q

A Profile can have many users, but a user can have only one profile.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
391
Q

You CANNOT delete standard fields but you can remove non-required standard fields from a page layout
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
392
Q

Reports and views are not renamed based on the new label value
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
393
Q

Custom Picklist fields can be either controlling or dependent fields
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
394
Q
The maximum number of values allowed in a controlling field is:
A. 500
B. 100
C. 300
D. 200
A

A. 500 (Maximum number of values)

C. 300 (Default values)

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
395
Q
Multiple record types may be created for every tab, with the exception of (Choose 3 answers):
A. Home
B. Accounts
C. Forecasting
D. Opportunity
E. Reports
A

A. Home
C. Forecasting
E. Reports

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
396
Q
A Record Owner has the following privileges:
A. View and Edit Capabilities
B. Transfer Capabilities
C. Deletion Capabilities
D. Import Leads Capabilities
E. Import Opportunity Capabilities
A

A. View and Edit Capabilities
B. Transfer Capabilities
C. Deletion Capabilities

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
397
Q

You can use Sharing Rules to grant wider access to data. You cannot restrict access below your OWD levels.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
398
Q
The SideBar search does not Search the following: Choose 3 answers
A. Custom Objects
B. Documents
C. Products
D. Reports
E. Solutions
A

B. Documents
C. Products
E. Solutions

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
399
Q

Workflow Tasks are NOT tracked in the Activity History.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
400
Q

Time-Dependent Workflow Maximum Triggers Allowed Per Rule:
A. Maximum of 10 time triggers per rule
B. Maximum of 20 time triggers per rule
C. Maximum of 50 time triggers per rule

A

A. Maximum of 10 time triggers per rule

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
401
Q

Universal Containers would like their sales reps to be able to send branded email invitations to customers for business meetings and to collaborate with customers from a branded Website to find a suitable meeting time.
How can an Administrator accomplish this?
A. Create a custom email template for invitations that displays your compant logo
B. Add a company logo to meeting requests in Salesforce
C. Create an external integration with Google calendar using Sites
D. Enable Chatter to allow reps to Communicate with customers

A

A. Create a custom email template for invitations that displays your compant logo

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
402
Q

Which statement is TRUE regarding Dynamic Dashboards:
A. They show data from the perspective of the logged-in user.
B. They are automatically created when you create a Custom Object
C. They perform calculations that standard dashboards cannot
D. They display the source report as you hover over a dashboard component

A

A. They show data from the perspective of the logged-in user.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
403
Q

Marketing and Sales users at Universal Containers would like more visibility into Lead and Contact participation in this years Trade Show. How would an
Administrator build this into the application? Choose 2 answers
A. Create Cross-object formula fields to display campaign member record details on a lead or a contact record
B. Alert lead and contact owners with workflow when a prospective customer regsiters for the event
C. Customize the campaign member related list on the lead or contact object
D. Create Cross-object formula fields to display lead or contact record details on a campaign member record

A

B. Alert lead and contact owners with workflow when a prospective customer regsiters for the event
C. Customize the campaign member related list on the lead or contact object

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
404
Q

How does an agent submit an article for publishing? Choose 3 answers:
A. Promote an Answer for consideration
B. Re-assign an article to the publishing queue
C. Publish an article to the solution category
D. Submit an article upon closing a case
E. Publish at-will, with “Manage Articles” profile permission

A

A. Promote an Answer for consideration
D. Submit an article upon closing a case
E. Publish at-will, with “Manage Articles” profile permission

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
405
Q

How can Chatter feed for content can be used? Choose 2 answers
A. To store Chatter posts in content
B. To share files from a workspace to a feed
C. To link a workspace to a Chatter from content
D. To search for files posted to Chatter from content

A

B. To share files from a workspace to a feed

D. To search for files posted to Chatter from content

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
406
Q

Which statement is TRUE regarding dependent lookups? Choose 2 answers:
A. They can be configured to make fields on related records, depending on data in the source record
B. They can be configured to limit the records returned by a lookup based on the value of a field on a related record
C. They can be configured to compare data to external sources to verify that contact and prospect information is up to date.
D. They can be configured when creating the master-detail or lookup relationships

A

A. They can be configured to make fields on related records, depending on data in the source record
B. They can be configured to limit the records returned by a lookup based on the value of a field on a related record

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
407
Q

Which is a capability of drag-and-drop dashboards? Choose 2 answers:
A. Drag and Drop a dashboard onto any page in Salesforce
B. Drag and Drop records onto a dashboard
C. Drag and Drop reports onto a dashboard as the data source of the component
D. Drag and Drop chart types onto a dashboard to create a component

A

C. Drag and Drop reports onto a dashboard as the data source of the component
D. Drag and Drop chart types onto a dashboard to create a component

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
408
Q

Which is a capability of the Cloud Scheduler? Choose 2 answers:
A. Allow a user to propose multiple meeting times
B. Automatic propose meeting times based on Salesforce user calendars
C. Sync a Salesforce calendar with an Outlook Calendar
D. Custom brand different invitations per customer

A

A. Allow a user to propose multiple meeting times

B. Automatic propose meeting times based on Salesforce user calendars

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
409
Q

Which is a capability of Chatter? Choose 3 answers:
A. Receive updates related to records followed by a user
B. Share updates, files, and links with Leads and Contacts
C. Receive recommendations for users and records to follow
D. Follow people within Salesforce organization
E. Post updates, files, links to Chatter pages

A

A. Receive updates related to records followed by a user
D. Follow people within Salesforce organization
E. Post updates, files, links to Chatter pages

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
410
Q

How can an Administrator customize campaign members? Choose 2 answers:
A. Display Lead or Contact data directly on a campaign member record
B. Create an approval process for new campaign members
C. Customize the campaign history related list to include campaign member custom fields
D. Display key campaign member data on an opportunity record

A

A. Display Lead or Contact data directly on a campaign member record
C. Customize the campaign history related list to include campaign member custom fields

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
411
Q

What determines the suggested criteria for lookup filter?
A. Previously used filter criteria
B. Organization Wide Defautl settings
C. The current application schema
D. A survey taken when enabling this feature

A

A. Previously used filter criteria

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
412
Q
What can an agent do when resolving a case? Choose 2 answers
A. Email articles to a customer
B. Create an article upon closing a case
C. Assign data categories to a case
D. Attach only one article to a case
A

A. Email articles to a customer

B. Create an article upon closing a case

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
413
Q

Which is a feature of combination charts? Choose 2 answers
A. Display more than one summary value in chart
B. Add a third axis range to the chart
C. Display data from multiple reports in a chart
D. Add a second axis range to a chart

A

A. Display more than one summary value in chart

D. Add a second axis range to a chart

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
414
Q
The value in a Custom Field called Salary is 50,000. What would the formula, ISNUMBER (Salary_c), return
A. FALSE
B. TRUE
C. Depends on the Users Locale
D. 50,000
A

B. TRUE

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
415
Q

Which cannot be done on a Salesforce to Salesforce connection finder?
A. Identify the Salesforce systems administrator at another company
B. Custom brand an email sent to identify connections
C. Survey partners for their use of Salesforce
D. Survey customers for their use of Salesforce

A

D. Survey customers for their use of Salesforce

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
416
Q

Which action can be performed on the Campaign Member object? Choose 3 answers
A. Relate a business account to a campaign record
B. Create validation rules related to the campaign member record
C. Create custom lookup field to another object
D. Change a lead to a contact from the campaign member record

A

A. Relate a business account to a campaign record
B. Create validation rules related to the campaign member record
C. Create custom lookup field to another object

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
417
Q

Which is a capability of a campaign? Choose 2 answers
A. Add campaign members to other related campaigns using an Apex trigger
B. Convert leads to contacts from the campaign record
C. Update the campaign member status of a lead using the manage campaign members feature
D. Track the number of business accounts related to a campaign

A

A. Add campaign members to other related campaigns using an Apex trigger
C. Update the campaign member status of a lead using the manage campaign members feature

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
418
Q

What type of field can a lookup filter be applied to? Choose 3 answers
A. Hierarchical relationship fields
B. Master-Detail relationship fields
C. Relationship fields for records owned by queues
D. Lookup fields to the Account, Contact, User, and Custom Objects
E. Lookup fields to the Activity object

A

A. Hierarchical relationship fields
B. Master-Detail relationship fields
D. Lookup fields to the Account, Contact, User, and Custom Objects

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
419
Q
Which action type is represented by an icon in the process visualizer? Choose 2 answers
A. Request rejection details
B. View recall details
C. Start a new task
D. Send an email alert
A

C. Start a new task

D. Send an email alert

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
420
Q

Which function can be performed using enhanced profile management? Choose 2 answers
A. Merge profiles
B. Make mass permission modifications across multiple profiles
C. Make mass profile name changes
D. Edit profile permissions directly in a list view

A

B. Make mass permission modifications across multiple profiles
D. Edit profile permissions directly in a list view

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
421
Q

Which statement is true regarding High Volume Portal users? Choose 2 answers
A. These Users not assigned to roles in the role hierarchy
B. Users allotted extra data storage usage
C. Users can view documents from Content workspaces
D. Users cannot own an Account record

A

A. These Users not assigned to roles in the role hierarchy

D. Users cannot own an Account record

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
422
Q
Which two functions return the same result when used with fields of the same data type?
A. ISBLANK() and BLANKVALUE()
B. ISNULL() and LEN()
C. ISBLANK() and ISNULL()
D. ISBLANK() and ISEMPTY()
A

C. ISBLANK() and ISNULL()

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
423
Q

Which statement is TRUE regarding look up filters? Choose 2 answers
A. Lookup filters are available in the Partner and Customer Portals
B. Lookup filters can restrict lookup dialog results based on fields on the source object
C. The special date values “Today” and “This Month” are valid criteria options.
D. Lookup filters are case sensitive

A

A. Lookup filters are available in the Partner and Customer Portals
D. Lookup filters are case sensitive

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
424
Q

Which email address option is available to override the From Email Address in a Workflow Email Alert?
A. An active Administrator’s email address
B. A manual entered email address
C. An active user’s email address
D. An Organization-wide email address

A

D. An Organization-wide email address

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
425
Q
How would an Admin ensure that specific field values are always represented by the same color each time the value is displayed on any dashboard component?
A. Customize dashboard components
B. Customize dashboard settings
C. Customize source reports
D. Customize field settings
A

D. Customize fields settings

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
426
Q
When looking at a vertical column chart, what can a user click on to drill down to a filtered source report? Choose 3 answers
A. Component header
B. Individual groups
C. The Y axis
D. Legend entries
E. The X axis
A

B. Individual groups
D. Legend entries
E. The X axis

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
427
Q
UI component for tag Access (Choose 2)
A. Edit tag links
B. View tags on header
C. Sidebar widget
D. Search Tags
A

B. View tags on header

D. Search Tags

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
428
Q
Which Step is not a part of creating custom application?
A. Selecting tabs
B. Adding a logo
C. Selecting profiles
D. Creating a custom object
A

D Creating a custom object

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
429
Q
Which of the following are standard Salesforce applications? (Choose all that apply.)
A. Ideas
B. Campaigns
C. Administration
D. Call Center
E. Sales Center
A

A. Ideas

D. Call Center

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
430
Q

Is it true that campaigns and opportunities have many to many relationship?
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
431
Q

Which of the following will not bypass Identity Confirmation?
A. The user’s profile has IP login restrictions enabled.
B. The user has logged into Salesforce previously from their current IP address.
C. The user has activated this computer before and has a stored activation cookie.
D. The user’s record has the “Bypass User Identity Confirmation” checkbox enabled.
E. The user is logging in from an IP address within the list of trusted networks.

A

D. The user’s record has the “Bypass User Identity Confirmation” checkbox enabled.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
432
Q

Which of the following statements are true concerning email activation?
A. The email activation feature requires that the user click an activation link before logging onto a new computer.
B. The email activation feature cannot be disabled.
C. The email activation feature can be disabled by request to Salesforce.com support.
D. The email activation feature can be disabled through the UI.

A

C. The email activation feature can be disabled by request to Salesforce.com support.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
433
Q
When transferring an account from one user to another, which of the following options are selectable? (Choose all that apply.)
A. Transfer closed cases
B. Transfer closed opportunities
C. Transfer open activities
D. Transfer closed activities
A

A. Transfer closed cases

B. Transfer closed opportunities

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
434
Q

Using the following hierarchy, if a sharing rule exists granting Operations Person Read/Write access to Sales Management on the Account Object, what access does Operations Management have to Sales Management’s accounts?
Default access for the Account object is Public Read Only.

Executive Management -

Sales Management -

Sales Person -

Operations Management -

Operations Person -
A. None
B. Read Only
C. Read/Write
D. Read/Write/Transfer
A

C. Read/Write (Read/Write is granted through role hierarchy permissions from the sharing rule. If the sharing rule referenced a sharing group then the ‘Grant Access Using Hierarchies’ would not apply. This could also be true for a custom object; all standard objects require ‘Grant Access Using Hierarchies’.)

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
435
Q

Documents count toward Data Storage.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
436
Q

File attachments, document tabs, and sales force content count towards Data Storage:
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
437
Q

A record is modified on 1/1/2008. It meets criteria for a time-based workflow rule; this rule schedules an action for 7 days after rule execution. On 1/4/2008 the record is modified and no longer meets workflow rule criteria.
On 1/5/2008 the record is modified and once again meets the initial time-based workflow rule criteria. How many workflow actions will execute and when?
A. 1 on 1/8/2008
B. 2 on 1/8/2008 and 1/12/2008
C. 1 on 1/12/2008

A

C. 1 on 1/12/2008 (When the record is modified and no longer meets criteria on 1/4 the initial workflow action is dropped from the queue. The workflow action created on 1/5 is scheduled for 7 days after rule execution (which is 1/5), therefore the only rule that would be executed is on 1/12)

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
438
Q
What would prevent a user from including fields when running a report?
A. Field-level security & page layouts
B. Page layouts only
C. Field-level security only
D. None of the above
A

C. Field-level security only

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
439
Q

The system administrator has created a new custom object and application. This individual now needs to populate the new object with 1000 records, which are formatted in a CSV file. The Import Wizard (Data Management –> Import Custom Objects) is appropriate for this task.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
440
Q
You must create the business process before creating record types for each of these objects except:
A. Lead
B. Opportunity
C. Case
D. Campaign
E. Solutions
A

D. Campaign

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
441
Q
You can associate each business process with one or more record types and make it available to users based on their:
A. Role
B. Profile
C. OWD
D. Licence Type
E. Salesforce Edition
A

B. Profile

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
442
Q

In order to implement more business process multiple record types must also be implemented:
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
443
Q
Multiple record types may be created for every tab with the exception of (Choose 4 answers):
A. Home Tab
B. Forecast Tab
C. Documents Tab
D. Leads Tab
E. Report Tab
A

A. Home Tab
B. Forecast Tab
C. Documents Tab
E. Report Tab

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
444
Q

Field-level security can be used to make a field required
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
445
Q
You can customize to restrict users ability to log in to Saleforce with the following:
A. Profile
B. Role
C. Page Layout
D. Record Type
E. Security Settings
A

A. Profile

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
446
Q

It is possible for a user to own a record and not see it.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
447
Q
The Account owner, Opportunity Owners, and Case Owners:
A. Has to be the same user
B. Has to be from the Same Profile
C. Has to be from the same Role
D. Can be different Users
A

D. Can be different Users

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
448
Q

What is true about a Role (Choose 2 answers)?
A. Controls the level of visibility that users have to an org. data
B. Role is required while creating Record types
C. A user must be associated to one role
D. A user may be associated to one role

A

A. Controls the level of visibility that users have to an org. data
D. A user may be associated to one role

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
449
Q

What is True about the Role Hierarchy
A. Controls data visibility
B. Controls record roll-up forecating and reporting
C. Not necessarily the company org. chart
D. Controls Read / Write and Transfer Rules for each user

A

A. Controls data visibility
B. Controls record roll-up forecating and reporting
C. Not necessarily the company org. chart

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
450
Q
Which of the following components is displayed only if the record in the detail view has associated records?
A. List view
B. Mini Page Layout
C. Console layout
D. Mini View
A

D. Mini View

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
451
Q
Which of the following components inherits the record type and profile associations, related lists, fields, and field access settings from its associated page layout?
A. Console layout
B. Mini Page Layout
C. Detail View
D. Related Objects
A

B. Mini Page Layout

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
452
Q
What happens when an email is sent to a customer from a case?
A. Case hierarchy is reset
B. Case escalation is reset
C. Case escalation rules are deleted
D. Case assignment rules are deleted
A

B. Case escalation is reset

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
453
Q
What objects are cases related to?
A. Accounts
B. Forecast
C. Contacts
D. Campaign
A

A. Accounts

C. Contacts

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
454
Q

Why would you use early triggers?
A. To escalate a case according to a time zone
B. To allow notification before a case actually escalates
C. To escalate any case within a period
D. To send an auto response email to customers

A

B. To allow notification before a case actually escalates

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
455
Q

If using Customizable forecasting there is a seperate forecast role hierarchy
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
456
Q
How many Roles can I create for my org?
A. 200
B. 300
C. 500
D. No Limit
A

C. 500

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
457
Q

What is a Sharing Rule (Choose 3 answers)?
A. Automated rules that grant access to groups of users
B. Exceptions to Org. wide Defaults
C. Rules given for group of user working closely on a project
D. Irrelevant for Public Read / Write Organizations

A

A. Automated rules that grant access to groups of users
B. Exceptions to Org. wide Defaults
D. Irrelevant for Public Read / Write Organizations

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
458
Q

What is NOT true about sharing Rules?
A. Sharing rules open up access whereas org wide defaults restrict access
B. When I delete a sharing rule, the sharing access created by that rule is automatically removed
C. I can edit the access levels for any sharing rule. I can change the specified groups/roles for the rule
D. Sharing rules apply to all new and existing records owned by the specified role/group members
E. When I modify which users are in a group rule, the sharing rules are re-evaluated to add/remove access as necessary

A

C. I can edit the access levels for any sharing rule. I can change the specified groups/roles for the rule

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
459
Q
A public group is a grouping of all Except?
A. Users
B. Public Groups
C. Queue
D. Roles
E. Roles and Subordinates
A

C. Queue

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
460
Q

If Phil is promoted from a Sales Associate to Senior Sales Exec, and the new sales associate is appointed to take Phil’s responsibilities. What are the appropriate steps to transfer Phil’s account to the new associate?

A. Overwrite Phil’s User Profile with the new associates information and create a new profile for Phil.
B. Create a new profile for Phil as well as new associate. Deactivate Phil’s profile with Sales Associate role and transfer all the accounts, opportunities and leads to the new associate.
C. Associate the new role to Phil’s existing profile and Transfer all the accounts, opportunities and leads to the new associate.
D. None of the above

A

B. Create a new profile for Phil as well as new associate. Deactivate Phil’s profile with Sales Associate role and transfer all the accounts, opportunities and leads to the new associate.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
461
Q

Which statements are false for folders (Choose 2 answers)?
A. Access is defined either as Read or Read/Write
B. Access to folders does roll-up through role hierarchy
C. The document tab contains a control version capability
D. Access to folders does not roll-up through role hierarchy

A

B. Access to folders does roll-up through role hierarchy

C. The document tab contains a control version capability

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
462
Q
he size limit for documents uploaded is:
A. 1 Megabyte
B. 3 Megabyte
C. 5 Megabyte
D. 25 Megabyte
A

D. 25 Megabyte

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
463
Q

Author and the owner have same access to the document
A. True
B. False
C. Neither True nor False

A

B. False

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
464
Q

You can update licenses on the Company Profile.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
465
Q

A company that uses custom fiscal year: A standard forecast option is unavailable. The Admin will have to build a custom forecast for the same.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
466
Q
Where would I make a field required?
A. UI
B. Report Builder
C. Flows
D. Page Layout
A

D. Page Layout

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
467
Q

Activities are both Tasks and Calendars
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
468
Q

Field Level Security cannot be used to make a field required.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
469
Q

Which of the following is true that can cause data loss when an existing custom field is changed? (Choose all that apply.)
A. Changing to or from type Date or Date/Time
B. Changing to Number from any other type
C. Changing to number from Percent
D. Changing to one Currency from any other currency type

A

A. Changing to or from type Date or Date/Time
B. Changing to Number from any other type
D. Changing to one Currency from any other currency type

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
470
Q

Which of the statements is/are true for data validation?
A. Data Validation can enforce data integrity as well as make a field required in the page layout
B. Data Validation can prevent duplication of records
C. Data Validation run on the client machine after the user clicks the Save button
D. Data Validation rules are not enforced when using API & import operations
E. Validation rules can be activated / deactivated by the user

A

A. Data Validation can enforce data integrity as well as make a field required in the page layout
B. Data Validation can prevent duplication of records

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
471
Q

Identify the statement that correctly defines data validation:
A. Data validation ensures the integrity of data before its saved in SF
B. Data validation ensures the integrity of data after its saved in SF
C. Data validation ensures the integrity of data when data is imported in SF
D. Data validation ensures the integrity of data when data is exported in SF

A

A. Data validation ensures the integrity of data before its saved in SF

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
472
Q

Data validation ensures the integrity of data when data is exported in SF
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
473
Q

What statement is False for a workflow task:
A. To assign tasks to multiple users, create multiple tasks as outcomes of the rule
B. A single task can be assigned to multiple users
C. The due dates for workflow task is based on number of calendar days, The rule fails to recognize only working business days by default
D. Historical tracking is allowed for workflow task

A

B. A single task can be assigned to multiple users

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
474
Q

Will data be lost in a Custom Field if Data Type is changed to Number from any other Data Type?
A. Yes
B. No

A

A. Yes

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
475
Q
On Lead Conversion a Lead Object Custom field cannot be mapped to Which Object custom field?
A. Account
B. Contacts
C. Case
D. Opportunity
A

C. Case

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
476
Q

Dashboards can be created by using Standard Reports as Source Reports?
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
477
Q

Which tool should be used to Import more then 65,000 records in Salesforce.com?
A. SFDC Import Wizard
B. Data Loader

A

B. Data Loader

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
478
Q
Which of the following is NOT a Standard Salesforce.com Functionality?
A. Email to Lead
B. Email to Case
C. Web to Lead
D. Web to case
A

A. Email to Lead

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
479
Q
Which of the following is NOT a Mandatory Field while creating a User Record?
A. Profile
B. Role
C. Alias
D. Community Nickname
A

B. Role

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
480
Q

A user successfully login’s at 3:00 PM, What happens at 3:31 PM, if the Login hours for the user’s Profile are set from 7:30 AM to 3:30 PM?
A. User is automatically Logged Out
B. User keeps working continuously without any issues
C. User is asked in a Popup window if he would like to extend his session
D. User is logged out once he tries to do any DML (Data Manipulation) Operation i.e. Save, Edit etc.

A

D. User is logged out once he tries to do any DML (Data Manipulation) Operation i.e. Save, Edit etc. (No further action can be taken)

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
481
Q

What is the Impact on a User of the Organization level Locale Changes?
A. The default Locale of the user is also set to the new Organization Level locale
B. The User is asked for a Choice; if he would like to choose New Organization Locale or his own Locale
C. No Impact on the User as he keeps using his own default Locale
D. From a new session, user will see everything in the New Organization Locale

A

C. No Impact on the User as he keeps using his own default Locale

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
482
Q
API's are not available for use in which Salesforce.com edition?
A. Developer Edition
B. Professional Edition
C. Enterprise Edition
D. Unlimited Edition
A

B. Professional Edition

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
483
Q
Which Feature is not available in Salesforce.com?
A. Profile based Login Hours
B. Profile based Login IP Ranges
C. Organization based Login Hours
D. Organization based Login IP ranges
A

C. Organization based Login Hours

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
484
Q
For how many days deleted records are kept in the Recycle Bin?
A. 15
B. 30
C. 45
D. 60
A

A. 15

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
485
Q
Which of the following is the best way to make the Field Mandatory for everyone?
A. Page Layout
B. Validation Rule
C. Roles & Profiles
D. Field Level Security
A

B. Validation Rule

486
Q
Which of the following is not a Standard Salesforce.com Application?
A. Service
B. Sales
C. Call Center
D. Community
E. Marketing
A

A. Service

487
Q
Which of the following is not a Standard Salesforce.com Application?
A. Service
B. Sales
C. Call Center
D. Community
E. Marketing
A

A. Service

488
Q
Which of the field types cannot be used as an External Id?
A. Text Field
B. Number Field
C. Picklist Field
D. Email Id Field
A

C. Picklist Field

489
Q
Which of the following cannot be on the controlling side of the Dependent Picklist?
A. Checkbox
B. Custom Picklist
C. Standard Picklist
D. Multi Select Picklist
A

D. Multi Select Picklist

490
Q

Do Validation rules get enforced on the Lead Conversion?
A. Yes
B. No

A

B. No (Validation rules are ONLY enforced during lead conversion if validation and triggers for lead conversion are enabled in my org)

491
Q
On Lead Conversion, the Close Date of the newly created opportunity is automatically set to?
A. Blank
B. Today
C. Last Day of Current Quarter
D. Last Day of Current Month
E. Last Day of Current Year
A

C. Last Day of Current Quarter

492
Q
Which of the following profile permissions enables the User to edit any record, regardless of the Sharing Model?
A. Customize Application
B. View Setup and Configuration
C. View All Data
D. Modify All Data
E. None of the Above
A

D. Modify All Data

493
Q

Can an administrator change the profile settings of the Standard Solution Manager profile?
A. Yes
B. No
C. Depends on the Setting of the Administrator profile

A

A. Yes (in the standard profile, the Admin can update profile settings (i.e fields visible, recordtypes, page layouts,..) but NOT profile permissions (Object permissions, app permissions or system permissions)

494
Q
Queues cannot be created on which Object in salesforce.com?
A. Lead
B. Case
C. Account
D. Custom Object
A

C. Account

495
Q
Which of the following is not a valid business process in Salesforce.com?
A. Sales Processes
B. Marketing Process
C. Lead Processes
D. Support Processes
E. Solution Processes
A

B. Marketing Process

496
Q

What is the significance of the Primary Master Detail Relationship in a Junction Object?
A. Look and Feel is inherited from Primary Master Object
B. Record Ownership is inherited from Primary Master Object
C. No such Significance
D. Both A & B

A

D. Both A & B

497
Q

What happens when you delete an object that is related to a junction object by a lookup relationship?
A. The junction object is deleted
B. The related fields in the junction object is deleted
C. The master records are deleted
D. The intersection object is deleted

A

B. The related fields in the junction object is deleted

498
Q

Can the User Records be permanently deleted from the Salesforce.com?
A. Yes
B. No
C. Depends on Profile Settings of the Administrator
D. User Records can be archived so that they are available on request

A

B. No

499
Q
Which of the following objects CANNOT be imported via the Salesforce.com Import Wizard?
A. Leads
B. Accounts
C. Opportunities
D. Solutions
A

C. Opportunities (Accounts, Contacts, Leads, Solutions, Person Accounts, and Articles CAN be imported via the Salesforce.com Import Wizard)

500
Q

Salesforce.com record Id’s are Identical in?
A. Production and Config Only Sandbox
B. Production and Developer Sandbox
C. Production and Full Copy Sandbox
D. Record Id’s are always different in different environment

A

C. Production and Full Copy Sandbox

501
Q

A custom field is made Read only from the Field level security and Required from Page layout. The Field will be:
A. Read Only for the User
B. Required for the User
C. Throws an error and don’t allow to make Read only field Mandatory from page layout
D. User is given a choice in a pop up window

A

A. Read Only for the User

502
Q
Which of the following is not a Roll Up summary field operation?
A. SUM
B. MAX
C. MIN
D. COUNT
E. Average
A

E. Average

503
Q
How many fields can be enabled for tracking on a custom Object?
A. 10
B. 20
C. 30
D. 40
A

B. 20

504
Q
Which of the following is not part of the Profile?
A. User License
B. Page Layout
C. Record Types
D. Field Level Security
E. Roles
A

E. Roles

505
Q
How many Custom Summary Formula Fields are allowed on a single Report?
A. 5
B. 10
C. 15
D. 20
E. No limit
A

A. 5

506
Q

Is it possible for a user to see different Set of data in Report and in a Dashboard based on the same Report?
A. Yes
B. No

A

A. Yes

507
Q
Which of the following is not an available function in the Formula Fields?
A. HyperLink
B. Substitute
C. RPad
D. Vlookup
A

D. Vlookup

508
Q
Which of the following cannot be used as a source report for the Analytical Snap Shot?
A. Tabular Reports
B. Summary Reports
C. Matrix Reports
D. All can be used
A

C. Matrix Reports

509
Q
Which Import functionality of salesforce.com should be used if one needs to import the 30000 Cases in Salesforce.com?
A. Import Wizard
B. Data Loader
C. Any one of A or B
D. None of A or B
A

B. Data Loader

510
Q

All dashboard viewers see data based on the security settings of the Running User regardless of their own personal security settings.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

511
Q
How many custom fields can be created on an object in an unlimited Edition?
A. 100
B. 200
C. 500
D. 800
A

D. 800

512
Q
Which Type of Reports can't be used to create groups of data or charts?
A. Tabular
B. Summary
C. Matrix
D. None of the Above
A

A. Tabular

513
Q
How many Roll Up summary fields can be created in the enterprise Edition on a Custom Object?
A. 10
B. 20
C. 25
D. 30
E. No restriction on number of Fields
A

C. 25

514
Q
A sales team is a set of users that normally work together on \_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_ ?
A. Accounts
B. Leads
C. Opportunities
D. Contacts
E. Cases
A

C. Opportunities

515
Q
Which feature in SFDC combines a list view and related records into one screen with different frames so that users have all the information they need when interacting with Salesforce.com?
A. Accounts
B. Asset
C. Console
D. Call Center
E. Campaign
A

C. Console

516
Q

On which OWD sharing defaults can the Sharing Rules not be defined?
A. OWD is Private
B. OWD is Public Read-Only
C. OWD is Public Read/Write
D. Sharing rules can be created on any of the above

A

C. OWD is Public Read/Write

517
Q

What happens when a user owns an opportunity record but does not have the Read permission on Opportunity Object?
A. He still sees the Opportunity record
B. He is not able to see the Opportunity Record
C. This case can never arise

A

B. He is not able to see the Opportunity Record

518
Q
The Account team is a set of users that normally work together on \_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_?
A. Accounts
B. Leads
C. Opportunities
D. Contacts
E. Cases
A

A. Accounts

519
Q
Conditional highlighting can not be used for?
A. Tabular Reports
B. Summary Reports
C. Matrix Reports
D. None of the Above
A

A. Tabular Reports

520
Q

You can use conditional highlighting for summary and matrix report only.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

521
Q
Which of the following is an automated process your organization can use to approve records in Salesforce.com?
A. Validation Process
B. Approval Process
C. Workflow Rules
D. Record Types
A

B. Approval Process

522
Q
Which of the following Email Template cannot be used to send a mass email?
A. Text
B. HTML with Letterhead
C. Custom HTML
D. Visual force
A

D. Visual force

523
Q
Which of the following object does not support the Business process?
A. Lead
B. Account
C. Opportunity
D. Case
E. Solution
A

B. Account

524
Q
Which of the following does not need business process?
A. Leads
B. Opportunities
C. Contacts
D. Cases
A

C. Contacts

525
Q
In which of the following edition you can create a Managed Package?
A. Professional Edition
B. Full Test Sandbox
C. Developer Edition
D. Unlimited Edition
E. Enterprise Edition
A

C. Developer Edition

526
Q

Can a user restrict access with the help of the sharing rules?
A. Yes
B. No

A

B. No

527
Q

Is it possible for users to override their own forecasts and forecasts for users below them in the forecast hierarchy?
A. Yes
B. No

A

A. Yes

528
Q

With sharing rules one can make automatic exceptions to the organization-wide default for defined sets of users.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

529
Q

An opportunity that reaches the threshold with 80% probability will trigger additional alerts if the probability subsequently goes higher to 85%.
A. Yes
B. No
C. Depends on the Settings

A

B. No

530
Q
Which of the following types of packages can be upgraded?
A. Managed Packages
B. Unmanaged Packages
C. Both A & B
D. None of the Above
A

A. Managed Packages

531
Q
Which of the following feature allows you to send an email when an opportunity reaches a threshold value?
A. Validation Rule
B. Big Deal Alert
C. Opportunity Alert
D. Big Ticket Email
A

B. Big Deal Alert

532
Q

Conditional Highlighting only applies to the first summary field column in the table?
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

533
Q

Unmanaged packages do not include locked components but can be upgraded?
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

534
Q
Auto Response rules work on which objects?
A. Leads and Cases
B. Leads and Accounts
C. Accounts and Opportunity
D. Account and Cases
A

A. Leads and Cases

535
Q

Escalation rules only run during the business hours with which they are associated?
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

536
Q

Customizable Forecasting is a prerequisite in order to enable territory management?
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

537
Q

Running User concept in Dashboard allows users to view Data which normally they can not view?
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

538
Q

Can a user create his or her own Default Sales Team?
A. Yes
B. No

A

A. Yes

539
Q
How many ranges can be defined in the case of a Conditional Highlighting?
A. 2
B. 3
C. 4
D. 5
A

B. 3

540
Q
When are the formula fields Re - Calculated?
A. Every 15 minutes
B. Every time they are seen
C. After every DML Operation
D. Admin can set the time of Refresh
A

B. Every time they are seen

541
Q

How do you find out that the Approval Process is edited?
A. Last Modified By Field
B. Audit trail
C. History Record on Approval page layout
D. All of the Above

A

D. All of the Above

542
Q

How many Solution records can be imported via Import Wizard?
A. 500
B. 5,000
C. 50,000
D. Solution Records cannot be imported via Import Wizard

A

C. 50,000

543
Q

Formatting of report is maintained when it is exported via Printable View?
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

544
Q

Which one is the following is a salesforce.com definition for a Lead?
A. Any person, organization or company that may be interested in your products and services, not yet customers
B. An organization, individual or company involved with your business such as customers, competitors and partners
C. Any potential revenue-generating event i.e. ג€sales dealג€
D. Any individual or influencer associated with an account

A

A. Any person, organization or company that may be interested in your products and services, not yet customers

545
Q

If you delete an email from a case and then delete the case, you will not be able to retrieve the deleted email from the Recycle Bin
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

546
Q
On which of these areas Data Validation rules are enforced but no feedback is given to users?
A. Lead Convert
B. Record Merger
C. Web-To-Case
D. SalesForce Mobile
E. Self Service Portal
A

C. Web-To-Case

547
Q

What should be the Advanced filter Conditions to meet the requirement `Find contacts owned by Pooh that have a title of CFO, functional role of CFO, or reports to the CFO?

1) Title equals CFO
2) Functional Role equals CFO
3) Reports To equals CFO
4) Contact Owner contains Pooh

A. (1 OR 2 OR 3) AND 4
B. (4 AND (2 OR 3)) OR 1
C. (1 OR 2 OR (3 AND 4)
D. (1 AND (2 OR 3)) OR 4

A

A. (1 OR 2 OR 3) AND 4

548
Q

How many User records can be imported via Import Wizard?
A. 500
B. 5.000
C. 50.000
D. User Records cannot be imported via Import Wizard

A

D. User Records cannot be imported via Import Wizard

549
Q

Which of the following is true about Page layouts?
A. Control the layout and organization of detail and edit pages
B. Control which fields, related lists, and custom links users see, on detail and edit pages only
C. Control which standard and custom buttons display on detail pages and related lists
D. Determine whether fields are visible, read only, or required, on detail and edit pages only
E. All of the Above

A

E. All of the Above

550
Q

To email a report to other users, the report must be in a public folder with access granted to the other users?
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

551
Q

When a field is deleted from the page layout, does it is also deleted from the Object?
A. Yes
B. No

A

B. No

552
Q

When you insert a record using the API, Validation rules are expected.
A. Yes
B. No

A

A. Yes

553
Q

Scheduled reports run in the time zone of the user who schedules the report.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

554
Q

Reports show only the information you can access where as Dashboards show information which you even cannot access.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

555
Q
Which of the following are not controlled by the Page layouts?
A. Custom Fields
B. Sections
C. Related List
D. Custom Button
E. Validation Rule Error message
A

E. Validation Rule Error message

556
Q

If a field is visible in the search layout but hidden for certain users via the field-level security settings then which of the following statement is true?
A. The field-level security overrides the search layout and the field will be hidden for all users
B. The field will still be visible in search layout to all the users
C. The field-level security overrides the search layout and the field will be hidden for those users
D. None of the above

A

C. The field-level security overrides the search layout and the field will be hidden for those users

557
Q

If a Report is run which returns 20,000 records then:
A. All 20K records are displayed in the UI
B. First 2K records are displayed in the UI
C. 10 Reports each having 2K records are created
D. Report Fails and an error is reported

A

B. First 2K records are displayed in the UI

558
Q

Deleting a Tab from an Application ___________.
A. Deletes the Tab from Salesforce.com
B. Deletes the tab from that Application
C. Deletes that particular Object of whose Tab is deleted
D. All of the Above

A

B. Deletes the tab from that Application

559
Q

Which one is the following is a salesforce.com definition for an opportunity?
A. Any person, organization or company that may be interested in your products and services, not yet customers
B. An organization, individual or company involved with your business such as customers, competitors and partners
C. Any potential revenue-generating event, i.e. sales deal
D. Any individual or influencer associated with an account

A

C. Any potential revenue-generating event, i.e. sales deal

560
Q
Which of the following make a User record Unique?
A. Profile
B. Email Id
C. Username
D. Role
A

C. Username

561
Q

Which of the following is NOT controlled by the Page Layout?
A. How detail and edit pages are organized
B. Field properties like visible, read-only and required
C. Controlling which fields, related lists, and Custom Links users sees
D. Page section customizations
E. Rollup summary

A

E. Roll-up Summary

562
Q

What does the dashboard snapshot on the Home Page display?
A. Only the dashboard determined by the System Administrator
B. You cannot display a dashboard on the Home Page
C. The first two rows of any of your available dashboards
D. The first row of any available dashboards
E. The Complete Dashboard set by the User himself

A

D. The first row of any available dashboards

563
Q
Which of the following can NOT be used to customize your Home Page?
A. Company logo (Image)
B. Dashboard Snapshot
C. Custom Links
D. Custom Formula Field
A

D. Custom Formula Field

564
Q

Though multiple campaigns can be influential, you can only designate one campaign as the primary campaign source on the opportunity.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

565
Q

Customer Portal users can view the tags section of a page, if it is included in a page layout.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

566
Q

If Custom Fiscal Years are enabled then you cannot use Standard Forecasting?
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

567
Q

Is it possible for an Account to be part of multiple Territories?
A. Yes
B. No

A

A. Yes

568
Q

Case escalation rules triggered on the last modification will be reset each time a user adds an activity or sends an email from the case record?
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

569
Q

Is it possible to have Sidebar search enabled with Global Search?
A. Yes
B. No

A

B. No

570
Q

Is it possible to report on the converted Leads?
A. Yes
B. No

A

A. Yes

571
Q

The opportunities fields of the campaign statistics section on a campaign detail page will only be populated for the campaign designated as the primary campaign source.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

572
Q

Case escalation rules triggered on the last modification will be reset each time a user adds a related comment to the case.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

573
Q

For custom object records to appear in search results associated tab only needs to exist; the tab does not have to be visible to users.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

574
Q

Which of the following statements is/are true for sharing rules? (Choose all that apply.)
A. Sharing rules should be used when a user or group of users needs access to records not granted them by either role hierarchy or organization wide defaults
B. Sharing rules apply only to new records owned by specified role or group member
C. When you transfer records from user to another, the sharing rules are removed during the transfer.
D. You cannot change the specified groups or roles for sharing rules.

A

A. Sharing rules should be used when a user or group of users needs access to records not granted them by either role hierarchy or organization wide defaults
D. You cannot change the specified groups or roles for sharing rules.

575
Q

Users with access to opportunities as sales team members cannot extend sharing for those records:
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

576
Q

Which of the following are setting options for the User Interface?
A. Enable Collapsible Sections
B. Show Quick Create
C. Show customer Sidebar Components on All Pages
D. Transfer all Open Opportunities
E. Enable Drag-and-drop scheduling on List Views

A

A. Enable Collapsible Sections
B. Show Quick Create
C. Show customer Sidebar Components on All Pages
E. Enable Drag-and-drop scheduling on List Views

577
Q

The first approval step in a process specifies the action to take if a record does not advance to that step.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

578
Q
Account Teams might be utilized for what?
A. Sharing
B. Reporting
C. Private Sharing Model
D. Activities
A

A. Sharing

B. Reporting

579
Q

You can only use standard fields when generating email and mail merge documents for leads or contacts.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

580
Q
Which of the following chart types does not support Combination Chart?
A. Line
B. Horizontal Bar
C. Vertical Bar
D. Funnel Chart
E. Donut
F. Line Cumulative
A

D. Funnel Chart

E. Donut

581
Q

Custom Summary Formulas can run calculations on report calculations.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

582
Q

Which is true about a Chatter Plus user?
A. Contents, Ideas, Answers, Accounts, Contacts, Chatter, Groups, People, Profiles tab and up to ten Custom Objects only
B. Contents, Ideas, Answers, Accounts, Contacts, Chatter, Groups, People, Profiles tab and up to 20 Custom Objects
C. Accounts, Contacts and up to 10 Custom objects only.
D. It can access all that a Chatter Free user can, accounts and contacts and it can also access up to 10 custom objects only.
E. It can access all that a Chatter Free user can and it can also access up to 10 custom objects but not standard object.

A

A. Contents, Ideas, Answers, Accounts, Contacts, Chatter, Groups, People, Profiles tab and up to ten Custom Objects only

583
Q

Which types of files can be accessed from the Files tab?
A. Files attached to a Chatter group post
B. Files in Content Workspaces
C. Files attached to a Chatter profile post
D. Files uploaded to the Documents tab
E. Files uploaded to the Solutions tab

A

A. Files attached to a Chatter group post
B. Files in Content Workspaces
C. Files attached to a Chatter profile post

584
Q
Which function is available in the report builder interface, prior to running the report?
A. Save
B. Printable view
C. Schedule future runs
D. Show/hide details
E. Export details
A

A. Save

D. Show/hide details

585
Q
A controlling picklist can have up to how many values?
A. 399
B. 500
C. 400
D. 350
E. 450
F. 300
A

F. 300

586
Q

What does a profile control?
A. Tasks that users can perform on records they access
B. Relationship between two objects
C. View of records that users access
D. Fields available for view in related lists

A

A. Tasks that users can perform on records they access

C. View of records that users access

587
Q
What are the three core building blocks of Security and Access in Salesforce?
A. Profile Restriction
B. Organization-wide Defaults
C. Profiles
D. Role Hierarchy
E. Sharing
F. Chatter Groups
A

B. Organization-wide Defaults
D. Role Hierarchy
E. Sharing

588
Q

Record type picklist filtering applies to dependent picklists.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

589
Q
Which objects can be stored in a folder?
A. Emails
B. Documents
C. Dashboards
D. Reports
A

B. Documents
C. Dashboards
D. Reports

590
Q
Which Salesforce editions support Sandbox?
A. Unlimited
B. Professional
C. Contact Manager
D. Group
E. Developer
F. Enterprise
A

A. Unlimited

F. Enterprise

591
Q

What happens when you delete an object that is related to a junction object by a lookup relationship?
A. The junction object is deleted
B. The related field in the junction object is deleted
C. The master records are deleted
D. The intersection object is deleted

A

B. The related field in the junction object is deleted

592
Q

Opportunity products can be linked in a Lookup Relationship.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

593
Q

Which of the following statements about a user record are true (Choose 3 answers)?
A. Each has its own unique username.
B. Each has its own username which is not necessarily unique.
C. Both active and inactive users use license.
D. Each user must be associated with a profile.
E. Some users are not associated with any Role.

A

A. Each has its own unique username.
D. Each user must be associated with a profile.
E. Some users are not associated with any Role.

594
Q

A user who has access to formula field can reference fields to which he or she doesn’t have access to allowing him or her to view restricted data.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

595
Q
Which of the following needs to be specified in order to schedule a report?
A. The Running User
B. Start Date
C. Email Report
D. Preferred Start Time
A

A. The Running User
B. Start Date
C. Email Report
D. Preferred Start Time

596
Q
What is the maximum of actions per time trigger you can have in a Workflow Rule?
A. 50
B. 20
C. 40
D. 80
E. 33
F. 10
A

F. 10

597
Q

What is Conditional Highlighting for reports?
A. You can set conditions that when met will report the calculated fields
B. Set thresholds for report analysis
C. None of the above

A

C. None of the above (Conditional Highlighting is used to highlight field values on summary or matrix reports based on ranges and colors I specify)

598
Q

The running user doesn’t override the sharing role while allowing users to see high-level sales data for everyone, not just
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

599
Q

Which statements are true for the integrated campaign builder?
A. Cannot filter views by more than one campaign at a time
B. The maximum number of Leads/Contacts that can be added from a report at one time is 50,000
C. The maximum number of Leads/Contacts that can be added from the wizard at one time is 250
D. Can add converted leads to a campaign
E. Integrated Campaign Builder views are not exposed through the Force.com API

A

A. Cannot filter views by more than one campaign at a time
B. The maximum number of Leads/Contacts that can be added from a report at one time is 50,000
C. The maximum number of Leads/Contacts that can be added from the wizard at one time is 250
E. Integrated Campaign Builder views are not exposed through the Force.com API

600
Q
On Lead Conversion a Lead Object Custom field can't be mapped to which Object custom field?
A. Account
B. Contacts
C. Case
D. Opportunity
A

C. Case

601
Q

Which statements are true about standard fields?
A. Std fields are created by Admin
B. You can delete std fields
C. You can change the standard field labels
D. You can remove required std fields from a page layout

A

C. You can change the standard field labels

D. You can remove required std fields from a page layout

602
Q

Standard Fiscal Years are for companies that break down their fiscal years, quarters, and weeks in to fiscal periods.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

603
Q

What statement is true regarding a custom field formula?
A. Not reference standard, custom, or other objects
B. Can contain formulas upto 4000 character
C. 4000 characters is the limit on the compiled size of the formula
D. Formula can reference themselves

A

C. 4000 characters is the limit on the compiled size of the formula

604
Q

A Standard Fiscal Year can start on May 1st.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

605
Q

Active Currencies live in Company Profile, user record (Personal Setup) and in Opportunity (Record).
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

606
Q
Users can be restricted to view a particular field in views, searches and reports by hiding the field at
A. Page Layout
B. Field Level Security
C. User Profile
D. None of the Above
A

B. Field Level Security

607
Q
What are different Types of Sharing Rules? (Choose all that apply.)
A. Case Sharing Rules
B. Lead Sharing Rules
C. Solution Sharing Rules
D. Campaign Sharing Rules
E. Custom Object Sharing Rules
A

A. Case Sharing Rules
B. Lead Sharing Rules
D. Campaign Sharing Rules
E. Custom Object Sharing Rules

608
Q

Adding a user to the sales team group will give access to opportunity records that was previously a restricted account.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

609
Q

Can a delegated approver revoke a previously approved process?
A. Yes
B. No, once the request is approved only administrator can revoke the approval process

A

A. Yes

610
Q

Multiple Approvers have received your request for approving a discount that was invoked by the approval process? Approver A rejects your request. Approver B accepts your request after Approver A rejects it. Is your request approved or denied. (Assume you need only one person to approve out of all the approvers)
A. Approved
B. Denied
C. Approval process is revoked
D. Approval changes to pending stage due to conflict within approvers

A

B. Denied

611
Q

Data Validation rules are also enforced using the API and Import Wizards.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

612
Q

It is advisable not to overwrite user records with new user data because it would prevent you from tracking a history of past users and the records associated to them
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

613
Q

Where does the click path Your Name –> Set up -> Security controls -> Sharing settings lead to?
A. Custom Profile
B. Organization wide Defaults
C. Trusted IP Ranges

A

B. Organization wide Defaults

614
Q
Which of the following cannot be done by a user to records owned by others when the organization wide default is set to Read/Write to an object?
A. Add related records
B. Search Records
C. Delete records
D. Change ownership
E. Report on records
F. Edit details on records
A

C. Delete records

D. Change ownership

615
Q

Final reject actions can include actions such as email alerts
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

616
Q

When is a workflow rule triggered?
A. When a record that was closed now becomes open again
B. When you delete a record
C. When you are assign a record
D. When it is edited to meet the rule trigger criteria

A

D. When it is edited to meet the rule trigger criteria

617
Q
What are the two main parts of WF?
A. Actions and Time triggers
B. Rules and Actions
C. Email Alerts and Field updates
D. Rules and Tasks
A

B. Rules and Actions

618
Q
When are WF rules evaluated?
A. Before a record is deleted
B. When a record is created/updated
C. After a record is created
D. When a record is cloned
A

B. When a record is created/updated

619
Q

Org wide default is set to private. Kathy is assigned US Sales Director role with access rights to view opportunities owned by other users associated to her accounts. Jennifer is assigned EMEA Rep Role and Phil to US rep role. Which business opportunities can Kathy VIEW and EDIT?
A. Kathy can edit and view her own opportunities
B. Kathy can EDIT and VIEW her jennifers opportunities
C. Kathy can edit and view Phils opportunities
D. Kathy can view but cannot EDIT phils opportunities
E. Kathy can View but cannot edit Jennifers opportunities

A

A. Kathy can edit and view her own opportunities
C. Kathy can edit and view Phils opportunities
E. Kathy can View but cannot edit Jennifers opportunities

620
Q

How would you allow collaborative access to accounts , contacts, contracts, opportunities, and cases of a US Sales rep, and Asia sales rep, and an EMEA sales rep?
A. By Creating three sharing rules between them
B. By creating a public group with all three Sales Reps
C. By changing the Org wide defaults

A

B. By creating a public group with all three Sales Reps

621
Q

Will WF evaluate rules retroactively?
A. Yes
B. No

A

B. No (When a WF is created, SF will only evaluate the rule for records created / edited from that moment forward, it will not evaluate workflow rules retroactively. That’s tasks/emails will not be created for existing records in the DB that already meet the criteria necessary for the rule to trigger)

622
Q

Can WF update formula fields?
A. Yes
B. No

A

B. No (Read-only fields like formula or auto number fields are not available for field updates)

623
Q

Can you perform field updates on an object related to a rule?
A. Yes
B. No

A

A. Yes (Except for case comment and Email message records, I can create a field update action that updates a field on the related case record. For example, I can create a rule to change the status of a case from ‘Awaiting Customer Response’ to ‘In Progress’ when a customer adds a case comment)

624
Q
Record Types are not available in Select the right choice
A. Developer Edition
B. Enterprise Edition
C. Unlimited Edition
D. Professional Edition
E. None of the Above
A

E. None of the Above

625
Q
How many Solution records can be imported via Import Wizard?
A. 50,000
B. 5,000
C. 500
D. 50
A

A. 50,000

626
Q

AW computing has a discount workflow that requires approval from the Sales director when the discount is over 15% and from the VP of Global sales if the discount is over 30%. The sales rep has created a discount for 10% on a new opportunity. What happens when the sales Rep submits the request for approval?
A. Discount will be automatically approved
B. Request will be sent to the Sales director for approval
C. Request will be sent to Sales director and VP of Global Sales for Approval
D. Request will be sent to VP of Global Sales for approval

A

A. Discount will be automatically approved

627
Q
Which of the following components lets customers find solutions to their cases on their own?
A. Call center
B. Email
C. Chat
D. Customer Portal
A

D. Customer Portal

628
Q

A security token is required for API access when connecting from an IP address within the list of trusted networks.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

629
Q

Will users have to use their security token when logging into connect for outlook if their IP range has already been added to a trusted IP range?
A. Yes
B. No

A

B. No

630
Q

Which of the following statements are true about trusted ranges (Choose 2 answers)?
A. They enable end users to activate additional IP addresesses for accessing salesforce.
B. They are used to identify regular SF users.
C. They include IP addresses that are used in conjuction with a browser cookie.
D. They approve login requests from unknown browsers and IP addresses.

A

B. They are used to identify regular SF users.

C. They include IP addresses that are used in conjuction with a browser cookie.

631
Q

Which of the following statements is true about computer activation?
A. It is required to activate additional IP addresses for accessing SF.
B. It is required for all IP addresses and browsers.
C. It is required to access SF online.
D. It is required to identify regular SF users.

A

A. It is required to activate additional IP addresses for accessing SF.

632
Q

An admin changed the org default language from English to Spanish. What must end users do to see this change?
A. Nothing they will see the application in Spanish immediately
B. Refresh their browser
C. Logout then login again
D. Change their language personal preference to Spanish

A

D. Change their language personal preference to Spanish

633
Q

dentify the correct statement from the given list.
A. Lookup field link two objects
B. Lookup fields affect security
C. Lookup fields change the record ownership
D. Lookup fields can be used to delete an object

A

A. Lookup fields link 2 objects

634
Q
How can you ensure that a value is entered in a field?
A. By Field level security
B. By Setting property in page layout
C. By creating a lookup field
D. By defining pickup list values
A

B. By Setting property in page layout

635
Q

You can edit their user profiles and define Trusted IP ranges so that users don’t have to activate new computers within this range but without blocking those that are not.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

636
Q

Tab settings allow the System Admin to customize which tabs are visible to users.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

637
Q

Can you make a standard field unique?
A. Yes
B. No

A

B. No

638
Q

Standard picklists can be the controlling field but not the dependent in a field dependency:
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

639
Q

Which steps are required when configuring the new Salesforce for Outlook (Choose 2 answers)?
A. Select sync direction and conflict behaviour
B. Select the appropriate config template
C. Assign users and profiles to a configuration
D. Enable the chatter feed sync with Outlook

A

A. Select sync direction and conflict behaviour

C. Assign users and profiles to a configuration

640
Q

What can users do when Chatter feed tracking is enable for dashboards? Choose 2 answers.
A. Follow files and links for a dashboard.
B. Follow posts and comments for a dashboard.
C. Follow posts and comments for the dashboard source reports.
D. Auto-follow dashboards created by the user.

A

B. Follow posts and comments for a dashboard.

C. Follow posts and comments for the dashboard source reports.

641
Q
Where does Chatter Feed display (Choose 4 answers)?
A. On Chatter profiles.
B. On record detail pages.
C. On the Home tab and Chatter tab.
D. On List Views.
E. On Chatter groups
F. Under related lists.
A

A. On Chatter profiles.
B. On record detail pages.
C. On the Home tab and Chatter tab
E. On Chatter groups

642
Q
What is the maximum number of actions you can have per Workflow Rule?
A. 10
B. 20
C. 30
D. 40
E. 70
F. 80
A

F. 80
40 - Immediate Action
40 - Time dependent action
Total = 80

643
Q

Can logins on specific days be restricted?
A. Yes
B. No

A

A. Yes

644
Q

Can you create a Lookup Relationship to link an object with itself?
A. Yes
B. No

A

A. Yes

645
Q

A sales manager would like to view a dashboard from the perspective of different users and switch between users without editing the dashboard. How would an Admin enable this (Choose 2 answers)?
A. Grant the sales manager the “Drag-and-Drop Dashboard Builder” permission.
B. Create the dashboard as dynamic dashboard.
C. Grant the sale manager the “Manage Dynamic Dashboards” permission.
D. Grant the sales manager the “View My Teams Dashboards” permission.

A

B. Create the dashboard as dynamic dashboard

D. Grant the sales manager the “View My Teams Dashboards” permission

646
Q
How many Custom Summary Formulas can you have per report?
A. 1
B. 2
C. 3
D. 4
E. 5
F. 6
A

E. 5

647
Q

Mass Mail Contacts option doesn’t appear under the Tools section in the Contacts tab, what could have caused this (Choose 2 answers)?
A. The user Role is insufficient to view this tool
B. Email is unchecked for that profile in FLS
C. This is a bug and must be escalated
D. Mass mail is not enabled for the profile.
E. Mass mail is not checked in FLS

A

B. Email is unchecked for that profile in FLS

D. Mass mail is not enabled for the profile

648
Q

Even a user with “View all data” (VAD) permission cannot view hidden folders as well as folders shared to no one.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

649
Q

The maximum number of values in controlling picklists is the same as in dependent picklists.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

650
Q
What is the maximum number of records that return in a report without exporting the results?
A. 6500
B. 5000
C. 3000
D. 2000
E. 4000
F. 3900
A

D. 2000

651
Q
Name the benefits of the cloud computing model:
A. Multi-tenant
B. Scales with your business
C. Modest operating expense
D. No capital expense
E. Elastic
F. Pay-as-you-go
A
A. Multi-tenant
B. Scales with your business
C. Modest operating expense
D. No capital expense
E. Elastic
F. Pay-as-you-go
652
Q

Custom Summary Formulas can run calculations on custom formula fields.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

653
Q

Which are true about Trialforce Email Branding?
A. It is available only in Unlimited, Enterprise and Developer Editions
B. It allows you to modify system-generated emails so that they appear to come from your company rather than from Salesforce.com.
C. Trialforce Email Branding is automatically enabled for existing partners with Trialforce and when a new partner request Trialforce.
D. Trialforce Email Branding only applies to users who sign up for your application through Trialforce

A

B. It allows you to modify system-generated emails so that they appear to come from your company rather than from Salesforce.com
D. Trialforce Email Branding only applies to users who sign up for your application through Trialforce

654
Q

Enterprise, Developer and Unlimited System Administrators can create an unlimited number of Custom Profiles from scratch.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False (Admins can only create up to 1,500 custom profiles per user license type)

655
Q

When you define a Data Validation Rule, what else must you also define?
A. Whether or not the field is required
B. An Error Message
C. What email gets sent if the Rule triggers
D. Whether or not the record gets deleted

A

B. An Error Message

656
Q

You can set a default value for a custom field.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

657
Q

Select the order in which the Workflow actions fire in Salesforce.
A. Field Updates, Outbound Messages, Email Alerts, Tasks
B. Field Updates, Tasks, Email Alerts, Outbound Messages
C. Apex before Triggers, Apex after Triggers, Workflow Rules
D. Email Alerts, Outbound Messages, Field updates

A

B. Field Updates, Tasks, Email Alerts, Outbound Messages

658
Q
Which of the following is an example of One-to-Many Relationships between Standard objects?
A. Opportunities to Opportunity Products
B. Accounts to Contacts
C. Contacts to Tickets
D. Contacts to Accounts
A

B. Accounts to Contacts

659
Q

A record owner has the privileges to: View and edit records, transfer or change ownership of records, and delete owned records.
A. True. All the time.
B. False. All the time.
C. True. If Object permission is enabled.
D. False. If Object permission is disabled.
E. True. If Object permission is disabled.
F. False. If Object permission is enabled.

A

C. True. If Object permission is enabled.

D. False. If Object permission is disabled.

660
Q
Identify the maximum number of leads / contacts that you can add from a report at one time using Integrated Campaign Builder:
A. 25000
B. 50000
C. 75000
D. 100000
A

B. 50000

661
Q

When a lead is converted, it becomes an Account, Contact, and Opportunity (unless you opt out of creating an Opportunity)
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

662
Q

When you click Printable view, the report will display in a print ready format in Excel.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

663
Q

All personalization made to the Reports tab (expanding and collapsing of folders) is saved automatically. When a user returns to the Reports Tab in future sessions, the settings will remain intact until they are changed.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

664
Q

Can an end user import Members into a Campaign?
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

665
Q

Only users with “Create and Customize” permission can access the Report?
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

666
Q

Data Validation Rules are executed for a field (vs. as record).
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

667
Q

Customer Portal users can view the tags section of a page, if it is included in a page layout.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

668
Q
The number of formulas in a Custom summary formula is limited to:
A. 5000
B. 3900
C. 4000
D. 3000
A

B. 3900

669
Q

You can create Custom Summary Formulas based on Custom Formula Fields.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

670
Q

Which report format provides a tabular listing of data with sorting and subtotalling of said data.
A. Matrix
B. Tabular
C. Summary

A

C. Summary

  1. ) Summary - Displays a list of records sorted into groups with subtotals
  2. ) Matrix - Summarizes data in a grid to compare related totals
  3. ) Joined - Displays multiple blocks of data in a single report
671
Q
Which report type must be used to create dashboard components
A. Matrix
B. Joined
C. Summary
D. Tabular
A

A. Matrix

672
Q

How does a Profile differ from a Role?

A
  • Profiles are required, but Roles are not
  • Profiles determine which objects, fields, etc. a user can access
  • Roles determine what records a user can see relative to others in the organization’s hierarchy
673
Q

List views can (Choose all that apply.)
A. Show up to 2000 records in the record count display
B. Print up to 1000 records in print view
C. Be enabled and disabled by individual users
D. Print list can be exported to excel

A

A. Show up to 2000 records in the record count display

B. Print up to 1000 records in print view

674
Q

You cannot delete a standard report.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

675
Q

If my company’s fiscal year begins on February 1st and contains the 12 gregorian months, do I need to enable custom fiscal years?
A. Yes
B. No

A

B. No (As long as the fiscal year begins on the 1st of any month and follows the standard months, then custom fiscal years are not required)

676
Q

The User Interface Settings can be adjusted for individual users.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

677
Q

What are Standard Fields?

A
  • Default fields built-in to Salesforce

- These cannot be deleted

678
Q

Can standard fields be removed from the Page Layout?
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

679
Q
How does the Import Wizard perform matching when updating records?
A. E-mail
B. Username
C. Salesforce ID
D. Security Question
A

C. Salesforce ID

680
Q

What are the 4 field property options for Custom Fields?
A. Optional, Read/Write, External ID, Standard
B. Read-Only, Unique, External ID, Standard
C. Standard, Read-Only, Optional, Internal ID
D. Required, Read-Only, External ID, Unique

A

D. Required, Read-Only, External ID, Unique

681
Q
What objects have standard business processes?
A. Leads
B. Opportunity
C. Cases
D. Contacts
E. Sales (Opportunities)
F. Solutions
A

A. Leads
C. Cases
E. Sales (Opportunities)
F. Solutions

682
Q

What is a Super User?
A. Person who resets Users passwords
B. Person who creates Flows within an org
C. Person who can create, view, edit, and disable or delete all system resources
D. Person who is in charge of Chatter

A

Person who can create, view, edit, and disable or delete all system resources (this role is the most encompassing and wide-reaching user role in Social Studio)

683
Q

Define the Standard User profile:
A. This type of profile allows Users to have Org-Wide permissions
B. This type of profile allows Users to view, edit, & delete their own records
C. This type of profile allows Users to create permission sets
D. This type of profile allows Users to participate in Admin and stakeholder meetings

A

B. This type of profile allows Users to view, edit, & delete their own records

684
Q

Define the Solution Manager Profile:
A. This type of profile gives standard user permission and can manage solutions and solution categories
B. This type of profile allows Users to create solution groups
C. This type of profile gives solutions-based answers to Users
D. This type of profile connects Users to Solutions standard objects

A

A. This type of profile gives standard user permission and can manage solutions and solution categories

685
Q

Define a Marketing User Profile:
A. This type of profile imports both leads and contacts into the Org
B. This type of profile gives standard user permission and can import leads for the Org
C. This type of profile allows custom user permission
D. This type of profile gives Users access to the Marketing Cloud

A

B. This type of profile gives standard user permission and can import leads for the Org

686
Q

Define the Contract Manager profile:
A. This type of profile allows Users to give custom permissions
B. This type of profile allows Users to edit, approve, and delete Contracts
C. This type of profile allows Users to create, edit, approve, and delete Contracts
D. This type of profile gives standard user permissions and allows a User to edit, approve, activate, and delete contracts

A

D. This type of profile gives standard user permissions and allows a User to edit, approve, activate, and delete contracts

687
Q

Define the Read-Only profile:
A. Allows a User to view and edit records
B. Allows a User to read and delete records
C. Allows a User to view records
D. Allows a User to view, edit, and delete records

A

C. Allows a User to view records

688
Q

A checkbox can be a controlling field in a field dependency.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

689
Q
How many instances of personal tags can be applied to records?
A. 50
B. 5000
C. 50000
D. 500000
A

B. 5000

690
Q
What is required to create a new user (Choose 3 answers)?
A. Unique Username in email format.
B. Locale Settings
C. Profile - Standard or Custom
D. Role
A

A. Unique Username in email format.
B. Locale Settings
C. Profile - Standard or Custom

691
Q

A company has a custom field “Hours Worked” and the sys admin is tasked to create a validation rule so that field will not accept a negative value
A. Hours_Worked != 0
B. NOT(Hours_Worked < 0) C. Hours_Worked__C <> 0
C. Hours_Worked < 0 E. NOT(Hours_Worked__C > 0)
D. Hours_Worked__C < 0

A

D. Hours_Worked__C < 0

692
Q

What are the Org Wide Default permission options?
A. Public, Read, Write (Transfer on Leads/Cases)
B. Public Read, Write
C. Public Read Only
D. Private
E. Controlled by Parent (on Master-Detail Relationships)

A

A. Public, Read, Write (Transfer on Leads/Cases)
B. Public Read, Write
C. Public Read Only
D. Private
E. Controlled by Parent (on Master-Detail Relationships)

693
Q
The number of calculated values per report:
A. 5
B. 10
C. 20
D. 2
E. 15
F. 6
A

A. 5

694
Q

What methods allow access to an application?
A. Web Browsers (UI)
B. Mobile application (blackberry)
C. API (Connect for outlook, Connect for Lotus notes, Office edition, online edition, Data Loader)

A

A. Web Browsers (UI)
B. Mobile application (blackberry)
C. API (Connect for outlook, Connect for Lotus notes, Office edition, online edition, Data Loader)

695
Q

When you delete a product, the opportunity associated with that product will be suspended until further action is taken.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

696
Q

Delegated Admins are:
A. Users who are given Admin-level permissions
B. Users who can view modify changes in SF
C. Users who are in charge of the Chatter profiles
D. Users who are asisgned to create permission sets and set up field-level security

A

A. Users who are given Admin-level permissions

697
Q

What are Public Groups?
A. They allow Users to make their group public to the entire world
B. These groups have the ability to be public in the Salesforce Community
C. They allow Users to share between other Users, other Public Groups, Roles, and Roles/Subordinates

A

C. They allow Users to share between other Users, other Public Groups, Roles, and Roles/Subordinates

698
Q

What do Sales Teams do?
A. These teams focus on selling customers
B. These teams focus on creating Contracts for customers they sell products to
C. These teams focus on Opportunity Records being shared to a specified group of users based on the Opportunity Owner
D. These teams control the Sales Cloud in SF

A

C. These teams focus on Opportunity Records being shared to a specified group of users based on the Opportunity Owner

699
Q

What do Account Teams do?
A. Account Teams primarily focus on the Accounting Cloud in SF
B. These teams focus on Account Records being shared to a specified group of users based on the Account Owner
C. Account Teams focus on prospective customers and existing Users
D. Account Teams are groups of employees who work at call center and focus on existing client accounts

A

B. These teams focus on Account Records being shared to a specified group of users based on the Account Owner

700
Q
The number of business hours that can be set for the organization to operate:
A. 10
B. 20
C. 30
D. Unlimited
A

D. Unlimited

701
Q

As a system administrator you can create page layout in the console and assign it to profiles.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

702
Q

How does a Profile differ from a Role?
A. A Profile is made accessible in both Chatter and on Facebook and a Role controls what users can do with records in SF
B. A Role controls what a user can do with records (read, create, edit, delete) and a Profile controls the level of visibility that users have to organizations data
C. A Profile controls what a user can do with records (read, create, edit, delete) and a Role controls the level of visibility that users have to organizations data

A

D. A Profile controls what a user can do with records (read, create, edit, delete) and a Role controls the level of visibility that users have to an org’s data

703
Q

What is a roll-up summary field?
A. A roll-up summary fields lets you rollback the data that was changed last week.
B. The roll-up summary field is a custom field that aggregates child record information in to parent record
C. The roll up summary field is only accessible via API.
D. The roll up summary field gives you a summary of the data type and object relationship

A

B. The roll-up summary field is a custom field that aggregates child record information into a parent record

704
Q

When would I choose to build a Public Group?
A. When I want to make a Public Group accessible to the Trailblazer community
B. When I want to create lookups filters for Public Groups’ sharing documents
C. When I want to simplify the number of sharing rules built or when defining folder or list view access

A

C. When I want to simplify the number of sharing rules built or when defining folder or list view access

705
Q
Who can manually share records?
A. The record owner
B. The record owner's manager
C. The record owner's manager's manager
D. The system administrator
E. All of the above
F. None of the above
A

E. All of the above

706
Q

How are Folders used?
A. They are used to organize reports, dashboards, communication templates and documents
B. They are used to organize reports and documents only
C. They are used to organize documents from Public Groups only
D. They are used to organize dahsboards and documents only

A

A. They are used to organize reports, dashboards, communication templates and documents

707
Q
Where do images for email templates, Cloud Scheduler, etc. need to be stored?
A. In the Admin's e-mail 
B. In SF Marketing Cloud
C. In SF Documents
D. In SF Sales Cloud
A

C. In SF Documents

708
Q

What does a workflow approval process do?
A. It ensures Workflow Rules are carried out properly
B. It ensures Workflow Rule requests are carried out in the order they are received
C. It electronically captures a business approval on a SF data record

A

C. It electronically captures a business approval on a SF data record

709
Q

9 Elements Required for a Workflow Approval Process

A
  1. ) Approval Action
  2. ) Approval Process
  3. ) Approval Request
  4. ) Approval Steps (Assigned Approver(s)
  5. ) Email Approval Request
  6. ) Initial Submission Action
  7. ) Final Approval Action
  8. ) Final Rejection Action
  9. ) Outbound Messages
710
Q
Inline Editing updates the field when
A. The field is saved/updated
B. When the record is saved/updated
C. When the return key is pressed
D. None of the above
A

B. When the record is saved/updated

711
Q

True or False, Final reject actions in a workflow approval process can include actions such as email alerts.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

712
Q

Record locking in a workflow approval process prevents users from editing a record only if they have a certain field-level security or sharing settings.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

713
Q

Data Validation Rules are formulas that evaluate, “True”.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

714
Q

When are data validation rules executed (More than 1 answer)?
A. A User Saves a Record
B. Before records are imported
C. Using the Data Loader and/or other API tools

A

A. A User Saves a Record
B. Before records are imported
C. Using the Data Loader and/or other API tools

715
Q

According to Sales Force, console is not for occasional users of SalesForce. The console is best set up for users who view SalesForce for 3 or more hours a day.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

716
Q

When you define a Data Validation Rule, what must you also define?
A. The User’s Case
B. The object that will be affected by the Data Validation Rule
C. The error message
D. The case number for the Data Validation Rule

A

C. The error message

717
Q
What does the default locale impact?
A. The format of date and number fields
B. The number fields only 
C. The format of the date only
D. None of the Above
A

A. The format of date and number fields

718
Q
Which objects have built in import wizards?
A. Accounts
B. Contacts
C. Leads
D. Solutions
E. Custom Objects
F. All of the Above
A

F. All of the Above

719
Q

Do Opportunities or Cases have import wizards?
A. Yes
B. No

A

B. No

720
Q

Can the Data Loader access all objects?
A. Yes
B. No

A

A. Yes

721
Q

To log into the Data Loader, the IP address must be a trusted IP or the User must know their security token.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

722
Q

When is it appropriate to use the Import Wizard versus the Data Loader?
A. Use the Import Wizard when I need to prevent duplicates only
B. Use the Import Wizard when the Admin needs to choose whether or not to activate Data Validation Rules
C. Use the Import Wizard when I need to prevent duplicates and when the Admin needs to choose whether to trigger Workflow rules (or not)
D. All of the Above

A

C. Use the Import Wizard when I need to prevent duplicates and when the Admin needs to choose whether to trigger Workflow rules (or not)

723
Q

What are Standard Reports?
A. Reports that can be somewhat customizable
B. A predefined standard report type that cannot be customized. For example, the “Accounts and Contacts” report type
C. Standard report type that is only available in Marketing Cloud
D. Standard report type that is only available in Service Cloud

A

B. A predefined standard report type that cannot be customized (for example, the “Accounts and Contacts” report type)

724
Q

Standard Reports May be used as a starting point for Custom Reports
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

725
Q

Standard Reports can be deleted?
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

726
Q

Which takes precedence: User’s language setting or Company profile default language?
A. User’s Language Setting
B. Company Profile default language
C. None of the Above, they’re both important

A

A. User’s Language Setting

727
Q

Custom Summary Formulas are based on hard record values but used to create a temporary formula for custom reporting needs.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

728
Q

The Director of Sales wants a report that meets the following criteria:
All accounts in NY, MA, PA and NJ Account rating of “Hot” or Annual Rev over $8M .The report must meet the state criteria but can optionally meet the account rating or the annual revenue.
Which report format would you use to create this custom report?
A. The Tabular Report
B. The Summary Report
C. Matrix Report.

A

A. Tabular Report

729
Q

The Director of Sales wants a report that shows the Opportunity pipeline for the current and next fiscal quarters. This report should be grouped by Sales Rep and
Opportunity Stage. Which report format would you use to create this custom report?
A. The Summary Report
B. The Tabular Report
C. Matrix Report

A

C. Matrix Report

730
Q

The Director of Sales wants a report that shows the trending performance of his sales reps. He would like to see the trend by month, with a review of the previous
6 months. Which report format would you use to create this custom report?
A. The Tabular Report
B. The Summary Report
C. Matrix Report

A

C. Matrix Report

731
Q

Based on existing Master-Detail and Lookup relationships between objects, Admins can create Custom Report Types to (Select all that apply):
A. Choose which standard and custom objects to display
B. Select which fields can be used as columns
C. Define both inner and outer joins

A

A. Choose which standard and custom objects to display
B. Select which fields can be used as columns
C. Define both inner and outer joins

732
Q

The running user of a dashboard overrides the sharing model to see the high-level summary data for everyone at the level of the Running User and below.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

733
Q

Dashboard components can consist of:
A. Tables, Pie Charts, or other components that can be created with Visualforce
B. Charts, Metrics, Reports, and Tables
C. Charts, Tables, Gauges, Metrics, or other components that you can create with VisualForce
D. Donut Charts, Pie Charts, Gauges, or other components that can be created with Visualforce

A

C. Charts, Tables, Gauges, Metrics, or other components that you can create with VisualForce

734
Q

There are many dashboard components from SF Labs including the Apex Dashboard Kit which can be installed.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

735
Q
How many app exchange apps can you install in Professional Edition?
A. 5
B. 10
C. 15
D. 20
A

A. 5

736
Q
How many app exchange apps can you install in Enterprise Edition?
A. 5
B. 10
C. 15
D. 20
A

B. 10

737
Q
How many app exchange apps can you install in UE?
A. 10
B. 20
C. 30
D. Unlimited
A

D. Unlimited

738
Q

Can you uninstall an AppExchange application once it has been deployed?
A. Yes
B. No

A

A. Yes

739
Q
Where are Cases created?
A. On 'Cases' objects only
B. On the 'Cases' Object and 'Account' or Contact Related Lists
C. In the Case Cloud only
D. None of the Above
A

B. On the ‘Cases’ Object and ‘Account’ or Contact Related Lists

740
Q
How are Cases assigned?
A. By Manual Sharing Rules
B. By Assignment Rules
C. By Field-Level Security
D. By Permission Sets
A

B. By Assignment Rules

741
Q

Are the Self Service Portal and Customer Portal the same technology?
A. Yes
B. No

A

B. No

742
Q
When can inactive assignment rules be run on leads?
A. During lead import
B. During lead export
C. During lead upsert
D. All of the Above
A

A. During lead import

743
Q

Who can submit an idea to Salesforce.com IdeaExchange?
A. Salesforce.com partners
B. Sales force employees
C. Salesforce.com users
D. Anyone who has a login to Idea Exchange

A

D. Anyone who has a login to Idea Exchange

744
Q

Determine if the description is Master/Detail or Lookup - Child is deleted when parent is deleted:
A. Lookup
B. Master/Detail
C. None of the Above

A

B. Master/Detail

745
Q

Determine if the description is Master/Detail or Lookup - Lookup field on child is always required:
A. Lookup
B. Master/Detail
C. None of the Above

A

B. Master/Detail

746
Q

Determine if the description is Master/Detail or Lookup: For reporting parent and child fields
A. Lookup
B. Master/Detail
C. None of the Above

A

B. Master/Detail

747
Q

Determine if the description is Master/Detail or Lookup - Up to 25 such relationships:
A. Lookup
B. Master/Detail
C. None of the Above

A

A. Lookup

748
Q

Determine if the description is Master/Detail or Lookup - No inherited sharing:
A. Lookup
B. Master/Detail
C. None of the Above

A

A. Lookup

749
Q

Each workflow rule applies to a single object, such as leads, accounts, or opportunities.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

750
Q

Workflow rules can’t be triggered by campaign statistic fields, including individual campaign statistics and campaign hierarchy statistics.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

751
Q

Workflow rules can be triggered any time a record is saved or created, depending on your rule criteria:
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

752
Q

Workflow rules are triggered when a standard object in a master-detail relationship is re-parented, even if the object’s evaluation criteria is set to when a record is created, or when a record is edited and did not previously meet the rule criteria:
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

753
Q

Workflow rules never trigger on converted leads
A. True
B. False

A

A. True (Workflow rules are ONLY triggered on converted leads if validation and triggers for lead convert are enabled in your org)

754
Q

Workflow rules on custom objects are automatically deleted if the custom object is deleted.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

755
Q

You can’t package workflow rules with time triggers.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

756
Q

Workflow rules trigger automatically and are visible to the user.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False (Workflow rules are invisible to the end user)

757
Q

Saving or creating records can trigger one rule.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False (Saving or creating records can trigger more than one rule)

758
Q

Changes you make to records while using Connect Offline are lost.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False (Changes you make to records while using Connect Offline are evaluated by workflow rules when you synchronize)

759
Q

Salesforce.com processes any rules in what order?
A. Assignment Rules, Auto-response Rules, Validation Rules, Escalations Rules, Workflow Rules (with immediate actions)
B. Auto-response rules, Validation Rules, Workflow Rules (with immediate actions), Assignment Rules, Escalation Rules
C. Workflow Rules (with immediate actions), Assignment Rules, Escalation Rules, Auto-response Rules, Validation Rules
D. Validation Rules, Assignment Rjules, Workflow Rules (with immediate actions), Escalation Rules, Auto-response Rules
E. Validation Rules, Assignment Rules, Auto-response Rules, Workflow Rules (with immediate actions), Escalation Rules

A

E. Validation Rules, Assignment Rules, Auto-response Rules, Workflow Rules (with immediate actions), Escalation Rules

760
Q

There are no exceptions to the role heirarchy based sharing.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

761
Q

Who can delete records?
A. The ability to delete individual records is controlled by Admins only
B. The ability to delete individual records is controlled by Admins, the record owner, users in a role hierarchy above the record owner, and any user that has been granted Full Access
C. The ability to delete individual records is controlled by Admins and record owners only
D. The ability to delete individual records is controlled by CEO’s and Admins

A

B. The ability to delete individual records is controlled by Admins, the record owner, users in a role hierarchy above the record owner, and any user that has been granted Full Access

762
Q

You can enable Chatter in your organization without updating to the new look and feel.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False (Enabling Salesforce Chatter also enables the new user interface theme, which updates the look and feel of Salesforce.com)

763
Q

What happens if Chatter is enabled in an org with 15 or fewer users?
A. It can’t happen; Chatter can only be enabled in an org with 30 or more users
B. 5 users will automatically follow each other; the rest of the org needs to be added into the main Chatter group
C. 10 users will automatically follow each other; the rest of the org needs to be added into the main Chatter group
D. All users automatically follow each other

A

D. All users automatically follow each other

764
Q

Chatter is not available for Mobile Users.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False (You can enable Salesforce Chatter for Salesforce Mobile users by including the News Feed object in your mobile configurations’ data sets)

765
Q

Which fields cannot be followed in Chatter?
A. Auto-number, encrypted, and read-only system fields
B. Formula and roll-up summary fields
C. Auto-number, formula, roll-up summary fields, encrypted, read-only system fields, the Expected Revenue field on opportunities
D. Encrypted and the Expected Revenue field on opportunities

A

C. Auto-number, formula, roll-up summary fields, encrypted, read-only system fields, the Expected Revenue field on opportunities

766
Q

What is the Cloud Scheduler?
A. Allows me to request meetings with my customers, and have my customers select when they can meet before I confirm the meeting
B. Allows an Admin to only set up meetings
C. Allows an Admin to only request meetings with customers
D. None of the Above

A

A. Allows me to request meetings with my customers, and have my customers select when they can meet before I confirm the meeting

767
Q

You can use cloud scheduler to send meeting invites to contacts or leads or person accounts you don’t have visibility to.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False (You must have at least read access to the contacts, leads and person accounts that you request a meeting with)

768
Q

How many people can you send an invite to at a time using Cloud Scheduler?
A. You can invite up to 50 people to a meeting.
B. You can invite up to 20 people to a meeting.
C. You can invite up to 25 people to a meeting.
D. You can invite up to 55 people to a meeting.

A

A. You can invite up to 50 people to a meeting.

769
Q
Which object cannot use sharing rules to manage access?
A. Custom object
B. Standard object
C. Child to a parent object
D. Managed Package
A

D. Managed Package

770
Q

What is the process to create a custom app?
A. Create new App, select logo, assign profile
B. Create new object, select logo, create profile

A

A. Create new App, select logo, assign profile

771
Q

Which is true about Storage Limits?
A. Salesforce will allow a user to enter data up to 5% over capacity,
B. Salesforce will not allow user to upload data
C. Document tabs count against overall storage

A

B. Salesforce will not allow user to upload data

772
Q
Which permission allows a user to create a new solution?
A. Edit
B. Read
C. Create
D. Delete
A

C. Create

773
Q
If you delete a case, which two also get deleted?
A. Account
B. Solution
C. Event
D. Attachments
A

C. Event

D. Attachments

774
Q

When a user refreshes a dashboard, who does the dashboard get refreshed for?
A. The user and all those who have access to the dashboard
B. Only the user who refreshed the dashboard.
C. The running user only
D. The administrator.

A

A. The user and all those who have access to the dashboard

775
Q
Report charting is only available for:
A. Summary and Matrix reports
B. Tabular and Summary Reports
C. Tabular and Matrix reports.
D. Tabular, Summary and Matrix Reports
A

A. Summary and Matrix reports

776
Q
Which information not captured on user record in Salesforce?
A. Locale
B. Hire date
C. Employee number
D. Delegated approval
A

B. Hire date

777
Q
Creating ads that display on search engines is possible in Salesforce using:
A. MSN
B. Yahoo
C. AOL
D. Google
A

D. Google

778
Q
How many Editions are there in Salesforce.com
A. 2
B. 3
C. 4
D. 5
A

D. 5

779
Q
Which of them is not a Standard Business Object?
A. Accounts
B. Contacts
C. Ideas
D. Leads
A

C. Ideas

780
Q

It is only necessary for Identity Confirmation if IP address is unknown and browser cookie does not exist:
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

781
Q

In List View Enhancements, users can export list results to CSV file
A. True
B. False

A

B. False (You cannot export list view, you will need to create a report and export the report into excel)

782
Q

Export to Excel is available for Printable Lists:
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

783
Q

Users can search for Public Tags from the Sidebar and Advanced Search
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

784
Q

Personal Tags cannot be shared.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

785
Q

When you configure Search Settings for Your Organization, the new value must be between 5 and 50
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

786
Q
Salesforce.com instance has multiple currencies as Activated. What is the maximum granularity available for tracking changes in Currency Rates?
A. 1 Week
B. 1 Day
C. 1 Hour
D. 1 Minute
A

B. 1 Day

787
Q

Customizable Forecasting cannot be enabled for use with Custom Fiscal Years
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

788
Q
Which of these is NOT a Profile Component? Select all which are applicable
A. Access to Applications
B. Tab Visibility
C. Page layouts
D. Field-Level Security
E. Record Types Access
F. Permissions
G. Manage Currencies
H. Hours and IP addresses
I. Tag Settings
J. UI Settings
A

G. Manage Currencies
I. Tag Settings
J. UI Settings

789
Q

If a Standard Object is Renamed, the Reports are Renamed based on the new label value
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

790
Q

You can map a custom lead field to a Case
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

791
Q

A custom multi-select picklist can be the controlling field for a dependent field
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

792
Q

Picklist dependency rules are not enforced during Import
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

793
Q
A Lookup Field Relationship:
A. Links two objects together
B. Links two formulas together
C. Links two page layouts together
D. Links two Salesforce.com instances together
A

A. Links two objects together

794
Q
What is the limit on the compiled size of the Formula Field Select the correct choice?
A. 1k
B. 2k
C. 3k
D. 4k
E. 5k
A

E. 5k (Answer is 5k: Compile size limit—Formula fields can’t exceed 5,000 bytes when compiled. The compile size is the size of the formula (in bytes) including all of the fields, values, and formulas it references. There is no direct correlation between the compile size and the character limit. Some functions, such as TEXT, DATEVALUE, DATETIMEVALUE, and DATE significantly increase the compile size)

795
Q

What is Not True About Formulas?
A. Formulas cannot reference themselves
B. Fields that are used in formulas cannot be deleted
C. Can reference standard, custom, or other formula fields
D. You cannot use Case statement in a Formula Field

A

D. You cannot use Case statement in a Formula Field

796
Q

What does a Page Layout not control?
A. How detail and edit pages are organized
B. Page section customizations
C. Which fields, related lists, and Custom Links a users sees
D. Roll-up summary field
E. Field properties that are visible, read-only and required

A

D. Roll-up summary field

797
Q

On the page layout, some standard fields have properties which cannot be changed (e.g. the Created By and Modified By fields)
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

798
Q
Page layouts are assigned to users based on:
A. Layout Properties
B. Salesforce Golden Rules
C. Default settings
D. Assignment Settings
E. Profile Settings
A

E. Profile Settings

799
Q
History Tracking can be performed on the following Standard Objects except: 
A. Accounts
B. Forecasts
C. Contacts
D. Leads
E. Opportunities
A

B. Forecasts

800
Q

What is a Record Type? Select the right choice
A. Allows you to define different sets of picklist values for both standard and custom picklist
B. Allows you to define different sets of picklist values only for standard picklist
C. Allows you to define different sets of picklist values only for custom picklist
D. Allows you to define different sets of picklist values only for new picklist

A

A. Allows you to define different sets of picklist values for both standard and custom picklist

801
Q
An account team can be added by all Except:
A. Owner
B. Anyone on the team
C. Anyone above owner in role hierarchy
D. Administrator
A

B. Anyone on the team

802
Q

The Account Access, Contact Access, and Opportunity Access options depend on my sharing model
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

803
Q

The Documents tab does NOT contain version control capabilities
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

804
Q
The 'Create New Folder' link will only be visible to users with which permissions:
A. Manage Public Documents
B. Manage Documents
C. Edit Documents
D. Create Public Documents
A

A. Manage Public Documents

805
Q

You can set up Salesforce to automatically send email alerts, assign tasks, or update field values based on your organization’s workflow
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

806
Q

Workflow Field Updates specify the field you want updated and the new value for it. Depending on the type of field, you can do the following Except:
A. Choose to apply a specific value
B. Make the value blank
C. Delete the field
D. Calculate a value based on a formula you create

A

C. Delete the field

807
Q

Which of the following is true about salesforce?
A. Dozens of standard reports are provided by SF
B. Standard reports address the top needs of most users from Sales to Marketing
C. Standard reports can be customized and saved under a new name
D. Standard reports give you access to data you cant normally see

A

A. Dozens of standard reports are provided by SF
B. Standard reports address the top needs of most users from Sales to Marketing
C. Standard reports can be customized and saved under a new name

808
Q
Identify the dashboard components from the list
A. Dates
B. Tables
C. Gauge
D. Filters
E. Summary
F. Matrix
A

B. Tables

C. Gauge

809
Q

All of the following are true about Validation Rules EXCEPT:
A. All active validation rules are run each time at save
B. Validation rules are not enforced on existing data. They only run during subsequent record creation / updates
C. You can enter records through Data Loader bypassing the Validation Rules
D. Multiple error messages may be displayed at one time
E. Validation rules can be activated / deactivated by admin

A

C. You can enter records through Data Loader bypassing the Validation Rules

810
Q
Standard users can import a maximum of how many account records in a session
A. 500
B. 5,000
C. 50,000
D. 500,000
A

C. 50,000

811
Q
How many records of a custom object can a System Admin import using the Salesforce Import Wizard?
A. 500
B. 5,000
C. 50,000
D. 500,000
A

C. 50,000

812
Q

During a lead import, you can choose to enable active assignment rules as part of the import
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

813
Q

You can map a single column from the CSV file to multiple fields in Salesforce SFA.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

814
Q

You can only import only one language at a time per CSV file
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

815
Q

You can create parent/child relationships directly from the CSV import file
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

816
Q
You are limited to \_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_ new picklist or multi-select picklist values for any field during a single import
A. 10
B. 100
C. 1000
D. No limit
A

B. 100

817
Q

As an Admin you can schedule regular data imports using the Data Loader
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

818
Q
Your recycle bin record limit is \_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_ times the Megabytes (MBs) in your general storage
A. 20
B. 50
C. 250
D. 500
A

C. 250

819
Q

You cannot delete a product that is used on an opportunity
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

820
Q

You can delete the Standard Price Book or a price book that is on an opportunity.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

821
Q

Account Teams are not available for Professional Edition
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

822
Q

What is true for the Data Loader?
A. It deduplicates and inserts records
B. It comes installed with salesforce.com application
C. It can load all objects, including custom objects
D. It cannot load custom objects
E. It generates an error report after the loading

A

C. It can load all objects, including custom objects

E. It generates an error report after the loading

823
Q

When is a custom object created?
A. When there is a need to create a custom field
B. To enhance the look of the application
C. To capture unique data of the business
D. When there is a need to add custom tabs

A

C. To capture unique data of the business

824
Q
The organization wants users to view the details of the calendar of the accounts and the ability to add events. What should be the OWD for it?
A. Hide details
B. Show details and add events
C. Hide details and add events
D. Add events
A

B. Show details and add events

825
Q
A particular role needs to edit contacts, view, edit, and delete on contracts, and only view on accounts. Where can the Admin make the change?
A. User record
B. Profile
C. Organization wide default
D. Sharing role
E. Public group
A

B. Profile

826
Q
A particular team needs to track individuals working on cases and the individual roles of the people working on cases. Which is the best way to do it?
A. Profiles
B. Roles
C. Public groups
D. Sharing rules
E. Permissions
A

D. Sharing Rules

827
Q
An administrator has given access to all users to view the public folders in solution with categories. Which permission will enable the user to create more categories?
A. Edit on solution
B. Create on solution
C. Delete on solution
D. View on solution
A

A. Edit on solution

828
Q
Org wants to create a follow up task based on a field change. Which is the best way to do it?
A. Workflows
B. Rollup summary
C. Assignment rules
D. Record types
E. Workflow approvals
A

A. Workflows

829
Q

Which is not true about enhanced list views? (Choose 2)
A. Multiple records can be edited in list views
B. Dependent picklist can be edited with inline editing in list views
C. Inline editing is possible with list views
D. Record types can be changed in list views

A

B. Dependent picklist can be edited with inline editing in list views
D. Record types can be changed in list views

830
Q

The administrator wants to create 3 custom fields: An auto-number, A text field and A picklist. Is it possible?
A. Yes
B. No, because auto-number is a standard field
C. No, only multi select picklist can be custom created
D. No, only 1 custom field can be created per object

A

A. Yes

831
Q

If the data validation at web-to-lead form fails, who will get error report?
A. The lead queue
B. The lead will get created with error report in description
C. The designated web-lead owner gets an email
D. Salesforce.com support group

A

C. The designated web-lead owner gets an email

832
Q
Which salesforce.com feature allows the org to capture ROI on online advertising?
A. Web-to-lead
B. Web-to-case
C. Google adwords
D. S-controls
E. Online campaign
A

C. Google adwords

833
Q

Dated exchange rates can be set in the time range of
A. As short as a day and as long as a forever
B. As short as a minute and as long as a day
C. As short as an hour and as long as a month
D. As short as a month and as long as an year
E. As short as a month and as long as a quarter

A

A. As short as a day and as long as a forever

834
Q
Conditional formatting is available for:
A. Table & matrix
B. Summary and matrix
C. Summary and table
D. Matrix and tabular
A

B. Summary and matrix

835
Q

What can stop a scheduled report-dashboard run?
A. The report is scheduled for every week
B. There is another report to be run 15 mins before that
C. The running user does not have access to the dashboard folder
D. The report is saved in a folder you do not have access to

A

C. The running user does not have access to the dashboard folder

836
Q

Specifying a “running user” in dashboard means:
A. Any user above running user can edit and delete the dashboard
B. Any user below running user can view only their own records
C. Any user can view all records that the running user role can view
D. Only the running user can view the dashboard

A

C. Any user can view all records that the running user role can view

837
Q

What is true about look up relationships (Select more than one answer)?
A. Object in look up relationship can link to self
B. Child in lookup gets deleted if parent gets deleted
C. The child object in lookup is a related list for the parent
D. The lookup is required always

A

A. Object in look up relationship can link to self

C. The child object in lookup is a related list for the parent

838
Q
Which of these are inherited from objects on homepage in a console layout?
A. Related lists
B. Custom objects
C. Field level security
D. Page layout
A

B. Custom objects

C. Field level security

839
Q

If a field on page layout is required and is read-only on FLS, what would the user experience on UI?
A. The user is able to enter value because it is required
B. The user is not able to edit it because it is read only
C. The user is not able to see it
D. The user is able to edit it but not able to save it

A

B. The user is not able to edit it because it is read only

840
Q

Which statement is true about custom summary formula?
A. It cannot reference other formula fields in an object
B. It cannot be used in graphs
C. It can only be used in Standard Reports
D. It can only be used in Custom Reports

A

A. It cannot reference other formula fields in an object

841
Q
How do you specify the following in a formula field : the year of the custom date field(date_c) should be the current year:
A. YEAR(date_c)=YEAR(today() )
B. YEAR(date_c)<>YEAR(today() )
C. DATE(date_c)=DATE(today() )
D. DATE(date_c)=YEAR(today() )
A

A. YEAR(date_c)=YEAR(today() )

842
Q

A person account is different from business account because (pick 2 answers):
A. There is only one record type in person account
B. There is no contact related list in person account
C. There are no opportunities to a person account
D. There are no leads converted here

A

A. There is only one record type in person account

B. There is no contact related list in person account

843
Q

If territory management is enabled for your organization and a lead is converted, how does it get assigned?
A. Gets assigned to lead owner’s territory
B. Based on assignment rule
C. Get assigned to the user’s territory
D. Based on territory field

A

A. Gets assigned to lead owner’s territory

844
Q
What can a user do an account record that has been manually shared read/write with him/her (Pick 2 answers)? 
A. View the account
B. Edit the account
C. Transfer the account
D. Delete the account
E. Share it to other users
A

A. View the account

B. Edit the account

845
Q
When a case is deleted, all of the following are deleted except:
A. Case comments
B. Case activities
C. Solutions
D. Case tasks
A

C. Solutions

846
Q
What is true about Managed Packages?
A. They are not upgradeable
B. They cannot be uninstalled
C. They are upgradeable
D. They cannot be deleted
A

C. They are upgradeable

847
Q
Sharing rules can be formed on the following except:
A. Custom objects
B. Standard objects
C. Junction Objects
D. Objects on managed packages
A

D. Objects on managed packages

848
Q
Which one of these may be a controlling field and a dependant field?
A. Custom picklist
B. Standard picklist
C. Standard checkbox
D. Custom checkbox
A

A. Custom picklist

849
Q

What data can you request for in the weekly data export?
A. Only account data
B. Only report data
C. Accounts, opportunities, contacts, cases and solutions
D. All organization data

A

D. All organization data

850
Q
The Admin changes the organization time zone from "Pacific Daylight" to "Central". Which users will be affected?
A. All users in pacific timezone
B. All users in central timezone
C. All users in the organization
D. None
A

D. None

851
Q

Difference between workflow rule and workflow approval process is:
A. A workflow rule is based on assignment rule and workflow approval is not
B. A workflow rule is based on manual submission and workflow approval is not
C. A workflow rule has workflow actions where as workflow approval does not
D. A workflow approval triggers on manual submission whereas a workflow rule triggers on saving a record

A

D. A workflow approval triggers on manual submission whereas a workflow rule triggers on saving a record

852
Q

With the “Manage Campaign” button in Campaign selected, what can you do with the Integrated Campaign Builder (Choose 2 answers)?
A. Import new leads and add it to campaign
B. Associate opportunities to the campaign
C. Associate exisiting contacts to the campaign
D. Associate up to 50000 existing leads to the campaign

A

A. Import new leads and add it to campaign

D. Associate up to 50000 existing leads to the campaign

853
Q
A custom lead field can be mapped to:
A. One case comment
B. Two contact fields
C. One account field
D. One solution field
A

C. One account field

854
Q

What is the role of “Primary Object” when creating custom report types?
A. It lets us know if it can be the source of the dashboard
B. For reporting
C. To let the user select values in the view picklist
D. To ensure all are using the same set of business rules

A

C. To let the user select values in the view picklist

855
Q
A lead has been converted. Where can we find the campaigns associated with it (Choose 2 answers)? 
A. Campaign history list
B. Opportunity campaign related list
C. Contact campaign related list
D. Campaign history report
E. Campaign related list on account
A

B. Opportunity campaign related list

C. Contact campaign related list

856
Q
The company wants all opportunities associated with an account to be added in and displayed on the account record detail page. Is it possible?
A. Yes, workflow rule
B. Yes, custom summary field
C. Yes, roll up summary field
D. No, accounts cannot be edited
A

C. Yes, roll up summary field

857
Q

A sales user wants to have edit access to Opportunities but should not be able to import leads and should also be able to delete accounts. Is it possible?
A. Yes (customize a standard profile)
B. Yes(customize a custom profile)
C. No (as importing leads cannot be disabled)
D. No (accounts can never be deleted)

A

A. Yes (customize a standard profile)

858
Q
The administrator wants to track data over a period of time. Which graph would he use?
A. Line
B. Horizontal bar line
C. Pie
D. Table
A

A. Line

859
Q
Which graphs rely on grand total for dashboards?
A. Metric and table
B. Metric and gauge
C. Table and gauge
D. Table and line
A

B. Metric and gauge

860
Q

Which of these has many-to-many relationship?
A. Each solution is associated with one case, one case associated with only one solution
B. Each solution is associated with one case, but a case can be associated with multiple solutions
C. Each solution can be associated with multiple cases, but a case can be associated with only one case
D. Each solution can be associated with multiple cases and a case can be associated with multiple solutions

A

D. Each solution can be associated with multiple cases and a case can be associated with multiple solutions

861
Q

You can uninstall an AppExchange application once it has been deployed.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

862
Q

All existing custom objects that were previously deployed will still be deployed when you upgrade a managed application.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

863
Q
Users with which Permission can install or uninstall AppExchange packages from the AppExchange
A. Download AppExchange Packages
B. View AppExchange Packages
C. List AppExchange Packages
D. Visit AppExchange Packages
A

A. Download AppExchange Packages

864
Q

Custom Objects are reportable.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

865
Q

What is true about a Web-to-Lead (Choose 2 answers)?
A. An online form to capture lead information
B. Determines which Email Template to send to leads generated via Web-to-Lead
C. Contains Rule Entries that determine criteria for determining
D. Email Template response content published on your web site

A

A. An online form to capture lead information

D. Email Template response content published on your web site

866
Q

What is true about Lead Assignment Rule (More than 1 answer)?
A. Determines how Leads are automatically routed to User or Queue
B. Contains Rule Entries, pre-defined business rules, that determine lead routing
C. Virtual storage bin used to group leads based on criteria (e.g., industry, campaign)
D. Users have visibility into the Lead Queues to which they are members

A

A. Determines how Leads are automatically routed to User or Queue
B. Contains Rule Entries, pre-defined business rules, that determine lead routing

867
Q

Deleting a lead from a campaign does not delete the lead itself, but it is no longer a campaign member.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

868
Q

If your organization uses territory management, the new account is evaluated by account assignment rules and may be assigned to one or more territories.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

869
Q

If the lead has a record type, the default record type of the new owner is assigned to records created during lead conversion.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

870
Q

The system automatically maps standard lead fields to standard account, contact, and opportunity fields
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

871
Q

Who can view a Campaign in Salesforce.com
A. Sales and Marketing User
B. Marketing User only
C. Campaign Manager only
D. All users of Salesforce.com who have access to Campaigns Object

A

D. All users of Salesforce.com who have access to Campaigns Object

872
Q
Who can view campaigns?
A. Administrator
B. Administrator and Marketing Users only
C. Marketing User only
D. All users
A

D. All users

873
Q
You need which permission to specify a running user other than yourself.
A. View All Data
B. Modify All Data
C. See All Data
D. Change All Data
A

A. View All Data

874
Q

What is true regarding a Running User
A. The Running User overrides the sharing model and will allow the users who see the dashboard to see high level sales data for everyone, not just their own
B. The Running User overrides the sharing model and will allow the users who see the dashboard to see high level sales data for everyone, except their own
C. The Running User follows the sharing model and will allow the users who see the dashboard to see high level sales data for just what they own
D. The Running User follows the sharing model and will allow the users who see the dashboard to see high level sales data for just what they own plus role hierarchy.

A

A. The Running User overrides the sharing model and will allow the users who see the dashboard to see high level sales data for everyone, not just their own

875
Q
While Scheduling an email report, User specifies all except:
A. Specify a running user
B. Link to report
C. Specify a frequency
D. Set start and end dates
A

B. Link to report

876
Q
Custom Summary Formulas are:
A. Formula Fields on Record Types
B. Formula Fields for Custom Objects
C. Formula Fields which cannot be deleted
D. Calculations on summary fields
A

D. Calculations on summary fields

877
Q

Records in the recycle bin do NOT count against your organization’s storage limits
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

878
Q

Salesforce Console only displays views that were previously created.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

879
Q

The Console’s center frame is the detail page view of any record selected from any of the console’s other frame.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

880
Q

The mini view does not display if the record in the detail view does not have records associated with it.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

881
Q

Recent item and Lookup Hovers use the Record Mini Page.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

882
Q

Which statements are true about business processes?
A. Each business process is associated with one or more record types
B. Each record type is associated with one or more business processes
C. For opportunity objects records are created before business processes
D. Record types implement business processes through page layouts
E. Record types help track sales lifecycle s across divisions, groups and markets.

A

A. Each business process is associated with one or more record types
D. Record types implement business processes through page layouts

883
Q

When using advanced currency management, can a past exchange rate change?
A. Yes
B. No

A

A. Yes

884
Q

What happens when you delete a custom field?
A. Custom fields cannot be deleted
B. The field and its data are permanently deleted
C. The data in the field is saved and the field is permanently deleted
D. The field appears in deleted list from where it can be undeleted

A

D. The field appears in deleted list from where it can be undeleted

885
Q
Which of the following can NOT be edited on the Page Layout Editor?
A. Field positions
B. Buttons
C. Page sections
D. Related lists
E. Picklist values
A

E. Picklist Values

886
Q

Why would you create different Record Types?
A. To allow users to use different page layouts
B. To allow users to see different values in picklists depending on their job function
C. To allow users to use different Business Processes depending on their job function
D. All of the above

A

D. All of the above

887
Q

Which of the following are reasons for creating a Validation Rule?
A. To prevent users from entering bad data
B. To ensure users enter data only when it is required
C. To prevent bad data being imported
D. To hide fields from certain users
A. A, B, C & D
B. A, B, & D
C. A, B, & C
D. A, C & D

A

C. A, B, & C

888
Q
Which of the following are formats that you can use for creating a custom report?
(A)Hierarchical
(B) Matrix
(C) Summary
(D) Tabular
A. A, B, C
B. B, C, D
C. A, C, D
D. A, B, D
A

B. B, C, D

889
Q
Which type of field could you use to create a relationship between a custom object and another object?
A. Master-Detail Relationship
B. One-to-Many Relationship
C. Many-to-Many Relationship
D. All of the above
A

A. Master-Detail Relationship

890
Q
Data storage include the following: (Choose all that apply.)
A. Salesforce Chatter
B. Files in attachments
C. Cases
D. Email Messages
E. Ideas
A

C. Cases
D. Email Messages
E. Ideas

891
Q
Select all that are custom field types. (Choose all that apply.)
A. Phone
B. List Box
C. Number
D. Percent
E. Email
A

A. Phone
C. Number
D. Percent
E. Email

892
Q
What objects may be imported or updated using the Import Wizard? (Choose all that apply.)
A. Accounts
B. Opportunities
C. Leads
D. Contract
E. Contact
A

A. Accounts
C. Leads
E. Contact

893
Q

Advanced filter conditions can be applied to a roll-up summary field:
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

894
Q

You can include attachments in the Data Export.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

895
Q

Roll-up Summary fields and formula fields are always read-only on detail pages and are available on edit pages.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

896
Q

Sales User is a standard profile.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

897
Q

Partner portal and customer portal users aren’t required to activate computers to log in.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

898
Q

A solution can only belong to one category.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

899
Q

If the primary object on a custom report is a custom object, and the custom object is deleted, then the custom report type and any reports created from it will automatically be deleted.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

900
Q
Queues can be setup for which objects? (Choose all that apply.)
A. Leads
B. Accounts
C. Opportunities
D. Custom Objects
E. Cases
A

A. Leads
D. Custom Objects
E. Cases

901
Q

When setting up a User, the first name of the user is not required.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

902
Q

When you delete a case:
A. All related events, tasks, case comments, attachments, and associated solutions are deleted
B. All related events, tasks , case comments, and attachments are deleted.
C. All related events, tasks, case comments, attachments, associated solutions, contacts, and accounts are deleted.
D. Cases can never be deleted
E. All related tasks and case comments are deleted.

A

B. All related events, tasks , case comments, and attachments are deleted.

903
Q
The standard object permissions are: (Choose all that apply.)
A. Read
B. Update
C. Create
D. Edit
E. Delete
A

A. Read
C. Create
D. Edit
E. Delete

904
Q

“#Error!” displays on report cells if your custom summary formula output is over 18 digits.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

905
Q

You can use the Import Wizard to erase existing field values.
Once a custom field is deleted, can it be restored?
A. Yes
B. No

A

A. Yes (The recycle bin for custom fields feature gives the administrator 15 days to restore the field and its data)

906
Q

Which is true about Salesforce Knowledge Sidebar for the Service Cloud Console?
A. After spring 11 release, console users automatically see a sidebar that displays titles of Salesforce Knowledge articles that may solve the case they’re working on.
B. It automatically searches and returns articles from your knowledge base that match any of the words typed in the Subject of a case.
C. There is no such thing as Knowledge Sidebar.

A

B. It automatically searches and returns articles from your knowledge base that match any of the words typed in the Subject of a case.

907
Q

To minimize the number of sharing rules, use “Roles and Subordinates” over “Roles” where possible.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

908
Q

You have to enable the Report Builder Upgrade first in order to use Scatter Charts.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

909
Q
What is the new Chart type available after Spring 11?
A. Master Charts
B. Report Charts
C. Chatter Charts
D. Scatter charts
A

D. Scatter charts

910
Q
What is the limit of Look-up Relationships per object?
A. 25
B. 3
C. 4
D. 5
E. 38
F. 10
A

E. 38

911
Q

Joe imports records for Sara, a non-active user. Sara’s records will be assigned to Joe.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

912
Q
What is the limit of Master-Detail Relationships per object?
A. 35
B. 25
C. 15
D. 3
E. 2
F. 8
A

E. 2

913
Q

Joe is attempting to import an invalid value into a picklist field. The Import Wizard will respond with an error message.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

914
Q

Existing records that meet the Workflow Rule criteria trigger the Rule.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

915
Q

You cannot mass remove records from an approval process; removal of records must be done one by one.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

916
Q

Formula fields can be converted from or to other field types.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

917
Q

If you change the data type from a Checkbox to a Picklist, it can cause data loss.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

918
Q

You delete the Custom Field Region. All data related to Region will also be deleted.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

919
Q

You have to enable the Report Builder Upgrade first in order to use Master Charts.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

920
Q

Which of the following statements are true about Import wizard?
A. You can import Accounts, contacts, leads, solutions and custom objects using the Import wizard
B. You can work with both records of data and metadata
C. When importing data file size cannot exceed 100 MB and each record in the file cannot be bigger than 400 KB
D. Standard users can import up to 50000 account or contact records per session

A

A. You can import Accounts, contacts, leads, solutions and custom objects using the Import wizard
C. When importing data file size cannot exceed 100 MB and each record in the file cannot be bigger than 400 KB
D. Standard users can import up to 50000 account or contact records per session

921
Q

Formulas cannot reference any field that is restricted by Field-level security
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

922
Q
Record types are used to implement custom business processes by associating them to specific
A. Objects
B. Page Layouts
C. Records
D. Campaigns
A

B. Page Layouts

923
Q
How many lead assignment rules can be active at one time?
A. One
B. Two
C. Eleven
D. Twenty-three
A

A. One

924
Q

Which of the statements are true for Cases (Choose 3 answers):
A. Manually entering the case received from an email
B. Automatically generated by an email or website form
C. Can be assigned only automatically by rule assignment however it can be reassigned manually at later time
D. Associated to Contacts and Accounts

A

A. Manually entering the case received from an email
B. Automatically generated by an email or website form
D. Associated to Contacts and Accounts

925
Q
A virtual storage that can be used to group on criteria such as skill requirements, product categories, customer types, or service levels is called a:
A. Case Queue
B. Case Assignment Rule
C. Solutions Queue
D. None of the above
A

A. Case Queue

926
Q
How many External ID fields can you have per object?
External ID: When importing custom objects, solutions, or person accounts, you can use external IDs to prevent duplicate records from being created as a result of the import operation.
A. 1
B. 2
C. 10
D. 4
E. 25
F. 6
A

E. 25

927
Q

When creating a custom report type, making the status In Development hides the custom report type and any reports created from it from all users except those with the Manage Custom Report Types permission. Making the status In Development also prevents all users except those with the Manage Custom Report Types permission from creating and running reports from the report type.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

928
Q
Select the user permissions which override field-level security: (Choose all that apply.)
A. Modify All Data
B. View All Data
C. Configure UI
D. View Encrypted Data
A

A. Modify All Data
B. View All Data
D. View Encrypted Data

929
Q

Which of following is granted by the Manage Territories Permission? (Choose all that apply.)
A. Create and edit territories
B. Add and remove users from territories
C. Create and Edit Forecasts
D. Create and edit account assignment rules
E. Manually assign accounts to territories
F. Configure organization-wide territory management settings

A

A. Create and edit territories
B. Add and remove users from territories
D. Create and edit account assignment rules
E. Manually assign accounts to territories
F. Configure organization-wide territory management settings

930
Q

What is the maximum length of the alias field?
A. 12
B. 10
C. 8

A

C. 8

931
Q

If single sign-on is enabled for your org, API and desktop client users cannot log in to Salesforce CRM unless their IP address is included on your org’s list of trusted IP addresses or on their profile, if their profile has IP address restrictions set.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

932
Q

When creating a recurring event what are the maximum occurrences by interval?
A. Daily: 100 Weekly: 52 Monthly: 60 Yearly: 10
B. Daily: 100 Weekly: 53 Monthly: 60 Yearly: 10
C. Daily: 100 Weekly: 52 Monthly: 60 Yearly: 5
D. Daily: 365 Weekly: 52 Monthly: 12 Yearly: 1

A

B. Daily: 100 Weekly: 53 Monthly: 60 Yearly: 10

933
Q
Which of the following special picklist fields are not available for record types because they're used exclusively for sales processes, lead processes, support processes, and solution processes?
A. Opportunity Stage
B. Lead Status
C. Case Status
D. Solution Status
E. Case Origin
A

A. Opportunity Stage
B. Lead Status
C. Case Status
D. Solution Status

934
Q

Can I change the location of Chatter feeds?
A. Yes. Using page layouts
B. Yes. But only for Admin users
C. No. But they can be hidden or shown depending on user preference
D. None of the Above

A

C. No. But they can be hidden or shown depending on user preference

935
Q

You have a custom object called “Widgets” which has a Master-Detail Relationship with Accounts. What happens when you delete an account with associated
Widgets?
A. You cannot delete the account without first deleting the associated “Widgets”
B. The Widgets are deleted
C. The account is deleted, but the Widgets remain in Salesforce CRM

A

B. The Widgets

936
Q

What are the Start of Day and End of Day fields used for on the User Object?
A. Used to define the times that display in the user’s calendar
B. Restricts log in access to those times
C. Sets an Out-Of-Office Message

A

A. Used to define the times that display in the user’s calendar

937
Q

Roll-up summary and formula fields are always read-only on detail pages.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

938
Q

If you relabel a Standard Object the standard list views on every Salesforce tab will automatically be renamed.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

939
Q

Which of the following is true if you remove the “Read” permission from a users profile for a standard object?
A. Tabs of that object type will be visible, Fields of that type will not be visible on other tabs, related lists of that type will be visible on other tabs, search results will not return records of that type, report data for records of that type will not be available, merge fields of that type will not be available, and custom links of that type will not be visible
B. Tabs of that object type will not be visible, Fields of that type will not be visible on other tabs, related lists of that type will not be visible on other tabs, search results will not return records of that type, report data for records of that type will not be available, merge fields of that type will not be available, and custom links of that type will not be visible
C. Tabs of that object type will not be visible, Fields of that type will be visible on other tabs, related lists of that type will not be visible on other tabs, search results will not return records of that type, report data for records of that type will not be available, merge fields of that type will not be available, and custom links of that type will not be visible

A

B. Tabs of that object type will not be visible, Fields of that type will not be visible on other tabs, related lists of that type will not be visible on other tabs, search results will not return records of that type, report data for records of that type will not be available, merge fields of that type will not be available, and custom links of that type will not be visible

940
Q

How long does a backup data export remain on Salesforce CRM before it is automatically deleted?
A. 12 hours
B. 24 hours
C. 48 hours

A

C. 48 hours

941
Q

If you give a user the Weekly Data Export permission, which is needed to export data, he or she has view access to all data that is exported and can see all custom objects and fields in the Weekly Export Service regardless of their other profile settings.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

942
Q
Which field on the user record controls the currency for quotas, forecasts, and reports?
A. Default Currency ISO code
B. Locale
C. Currency
D. Information Currency
A

C. Currency

943
Q

When transferring leads to a queue open activities are also transferred.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

944
Q

When do scheduled dashboard refreshes occur?
A. Dashboards refresh in the time zone of the user who schedules the refresh.
B. Dashboards refresh in the Organization Default Time Zone.

A

A. Dashboards refresh in the time zone of the user who schedules the refresh.

945
Q

When you transfer an Account which of the following objects are automatically transferred?
A. Contacts (on business accounts only), attachments, open opportunities owned by the current account owner
B. Contacts (on business accounts only), attachments, notes, open activities, open opportunities owned by the current account owner
C. Attachments, notes, open activities, open opportunities owned by the current account owner
D. Contacts (on business accounts only), attachments, notes, open activities

A

B. Contacts (on business accounts only), attachments, notes, open activities, open opportunities owned by the current account owner

946
Q
You have created a custom field of the type "Number" on the Account object called "Number of Golfers at Client". You enter the following data in the field: 073.
What is stored in Saleforce CRM?
A. 0073
B. 73
C. 7.3%
A

B. 73

947
Q

When creating a custom report type all objects display in the Primary Object drop-down list, including those you do not have permission to view. For example, even if you don’t have permission to view leads, leads are available in the Primary Object drop-down list so that you can build lead report types for other users.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

948
Q

Which of the following are possible with a Master-Detail-Relationship? (Choose all that apply.)
A. You can create a Master-Detail Relationship field on a Custom object that references as a standard object
B. You can create a Master-Detail Relationship between two standard objects
C. You can create a Master-Detail Relationship between two Custom Objects

A

A. You can create a Master-Detail Relationship field on a Custom object that references as a standard object
C. You can create a Master-Detail Relationship between two Custom Objects

949
Q

Which of the following are true about the Default Division field on the User object?
A. Division that is applied, by default, to all new accounts and leads created by the user, unless he or she explicitly sets a different division. When users create records related to an account or other record that already has a division, the new record is assigned to the existing record’s division; the default division is not used. This setting restricts the user from viewing or creating records in other divisions. Users cannot change their division. Available only in organizations that use divisions to segment their data.
B. Division that is applied, by default, to all new accounts and leads created by the user, unless he or she explicitly sets a different division. When users create records related to an account or other record that already has a division, the new record is assigned to the existing record’s division; the default division is not used. This setting does not restrict the user from viewing or creating records in other divisions. Users cannot change their division. Available only in organizations that use divisions to segment their data.
C. Division that is applied, by default, to all new accounts and leads created by the user, unless he or she explicitly sets a different division. When users create records related to an account or other record that already has a division, the new record is assigned to the existing record’s division; the default division is not used. This setting does not restrict the user from viewing or creating records in other divisions. Users can change their division at any time. Available only in organizations that use divisions to segment their data.

A

B. Division that is applied, by default, to all new accounts and leads created by the user, unless he or she explicitly sets a different division. When users create records related to an account or other record that already has a division, the new record is assigned to the existing record’s division; the default division is not used. This setting does not restrict the user from viewing or creating records in other divisions. Users cannot change their division. Available only in organizations that use divisions to segment their data.

950
Q
What permissions does the "Manage Analytic Snapshots" permission require? (Choose all that apply.)
A. Schedule Dashboards
B. Run Reports
C. Manage All Data
D. View Setup and Configuration
A

A. Schedule Dashboards
B. Run Reports
D. View Setup and Configuration

951
Q
Which of the following are options when transferring accounts? (Choose all that apply.)
A. Transfer open opportunities
B. Transfer closed opportunities
C. Transfer closed cases
D. Transfer open cases
E. Keep Account Teams
F. Transfer custom objects
A

A. Transfer open opportunities
C. Transfer closed cases
D. Transfer open cases
E. Keep Account Teams

952
Q

Which of the following statements is true about Dashboard Refreshes?
A. Your organization is limited to no more than 400 scheduled dashboard refreshes. Unlimited Edition users can schedule up to two dashboard refreshes per hour per day; Enterprise Edition users can schedule up to one dashboard refresh per hour per day.
B. Your organization is limited to no more than 200 scheduled dashboard refreshes. Unlimited Edition users can schedule up to two dashboard refreshes per hour per day; Enterprise Edition users can schedule up to one dashboard refresh per hour per day.
C. Your organization is limited to no more than 200 scheduled dashboard refreshes. Unlimited Edition users can schedule up to four dashboard refreshes per hour per day; Enterprise Edition users can schedule up to two dashboard refresh per hour per day.

A

B. Your organization is limited to no more than 200 scheduled dashboard refreshes. Unlimited Edition users can schedule up to two dashboard refreshes per hour per day; Enterprise Edition users can schedule up to one dashboard refresh per hour per day.

953
Q
You can create which of the following types of email templates? (Choose all that apply.)
A. Text
B. HTML with letterhead
C. JavaScript
D. Custom HTML
E. Text with letterhead
F. Visualforce
A

A. Text
B. HTML with letterhead
D. Custom HTML
F. Visualforce

954
Q
What is the maximum length of any auto-number field?
A. 20
B. 30
C. 40
D. 50
E. 60
A

B. 30 (An auto-number field can contain up to 10 digits and up to 20 extra characters for
your prefix or suffix)

955
Q

What is the max length of the field type “Text”?
A. 3200
B. 320
C. 255

A

C. 255

956
Q
What is the maximum length of the field type "Text Encrypted"?
A. 255
B. 175
C. 128
D. 256
A

B. 175

957
Q

Which of the following utilize the “Automated Case User”? (Choose all that apply.)
A. When a case is automatically assigned using assignment rules this user is listed in the case history
B. When a email notification is triggered via workflow this user is listed in the case history
C. When a case is escalated this user is listed in the case history
D. When a case is created via Web-To-Case this user is listed in the case history
E. When a case is created via Email-To-Case this user is assigned as the case owner.

A

A. When a case is automatically assigned using assignment rules this user is listed in the case history
C. When a case is escalated this user is listed in the case history
D. When a case is created via Web-To-Case this user is listed in the case history

958
Q

Which of the following are true about the field type “Text Area(Long)” ?
A. 1) Maximum length of 32,000 chars. 2) Any length from 0 to 32,000 chars. is allowed 3) Line breaks do not count towards the max length of the field 4) This data type is not available for activities or products on opportunities
B. 1) Maximum length of 3200 chars. 2) Any length from 256 to 32,000 chars. is allowed 3) Line breaks do not count towards the max length of the field 4) This data type is not available for activities or products on opportunities
C. 1) Maximum length of 32,000 chars. 2) Any length from 256 to 32,000 chars. is allowed 3) Line breaks count towards the max length of the field 4) This data type is available for activities or products on opportunities
D. 1) Maximum length of 32,000 chars. 2) Any length from 256 to 32,000 chars. is allowed 3) Line breaks count towards the max length of the field 4) This data type is not available for activities or products on opportunities

A

D. 1.) Maximum length of 32,000 chars

  1. ) Any length from 256 to 32,000 chars. is allowed
  2. ) Line breaks count towards the max length of the field
  3. ) This data type is not available for activities or products on opportunities
959
Q

If your organization has territory management, account and opportunity list views can be restricted by: (Choose all that apply.)
A. My Territories
B. My Territory Teams.
C. My Accounts Territories

A

A. My Territories

B. My Territory Teams.

960
Q

Which of the following are true about Web-to-Lead (Choose 2 answers):
A. Salesforce CRM runs field validation rules before creating records
B. All required fields must have a value before a record can be created
C. The format for date and currency fields captured online is taken from the users browser settings

A

A. Salesforce CRM runs field validation rules before creating records
B. All required fields must have a value before a record can be created

961
Q

The Relationship Group Wizard lets you create and edit relationship groups regardless of field-level security.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

962
Q

For each profile, you can set the hours when users can log in and the IP addresses from which they can log in.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

963
Q

Which of following is granted by the Manage Cases Permission? (Choose all that apply.)
A. Set support business hours
B. Edit the Support settings
C. Set up Email-to-Case
D. Mass Transfer Cases
E. Create, Edit, and Delete custom fields on the Case Object

A

A. Set support business hours
B. Edit the Support settings
C. Set up Email-to-Case
D. Mass Transfer Cases

964
Q

You cannot delete all the record types for an object if the object is referenced in which of the following:
A. Apex Code script
B. Page layouts
C. Profiles

A

A. Apex Code script

965
Q

Which of the following are true about mapping fields for lead conversion? (Choose all that apply.)
A. You can map between text and picklist fields
B. You can map Number, Currency, or Percentage fields of differing lengths.
C. You can map Text or Text Area to long text area fields
D. You cannot map auto-number fields to fields of type Text or Text Area
E. You can map auto-number fields to Picklists
F. If you change the data type of any custom field user for lead conversion, that lead field mapping will be deleted.

A

A. You can map between text and picklist fields
C. You can map Text or Text Area to long text area fields
E. You can map auto-number fields to Picklists
F. If you change the data type of any custom field user for lead conversion, that lead field mapping will be deleted.

966
Q

You convert a lead that is linked to multiple campaigns. What is inserted into the opportunity Campaign Source field?
A. The campaign source field is left empty
B. The campaign with the most recently updated member status is mapped to the new opportunity
C. The first campaign linked to the lead, based on time stamp, is mapped to the new opportunity

A

B. The campaign with the most recently updated member status is mapped to the new opportunity

967
Q

If your org is configured for data export, you can schedule automatic backup files at what intervals?
A. Daily, Weekly, and Monthly
B. Daily and Weekly
C. Weekly and Monthly

A

C. Weekly and Monthly

968
Q

Formula and roll-up summary fields are included in backup exports
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

969
Q

Regardless of what language is selected on the user record, all online help is displayed in the organization default language.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

970
Q

You can map custom lead fields to standard fields on the Account, Contact, and Opportunity.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

971
Q

Which of the following statements is true about transferring leads?
A. You can transfer to users, but not to queues
B. You can transfer to queues, but not to users
C. You can transfer to both queues and users

A

C. You can transfer to both queues and users

972
Q

Email templates used in all of the following features must be public and active EXCEPT
A. Web-to-Lead & Web-to-Case
B. Sending an Email to a Contact
C. Email-to-Case or On-Demand Email-to-Case
D. Assignment rules
E. Escalation rules

A

B. Sending an Email to a Contact

973
Q

What is the purpose API Token field on the User object?
A. Displays the users API token
B. Indicates whether an API token has ever been reset.
C. Enables users to receive an API token

A

B. Indicates whether an API token has ever been reset.

974
Q

You cannot change the name of the default Person Account record type, and you cannot create additional record types for Person Accounts
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

975
Q

What is the maximum length of a Text Area?
A. 32000
B. 255
C. 3200

A

B. 255

976
Q
The Marketing User checkbox on a user record allows users to do which of the follow actions? (Choose all that apply.)
A. Create campaigns
B. Edit campaigns
C. Delete campaigns
D. Configure advanced campaign setup
E. Use the campaign import wizard
A

A. Create campaigns
B. Edit campaigns
C. Delete campaigns
D. Configure advanced campaign setup

977
Q

A default person account record type named Person Account is automatically created when person accounts are enabled for your organization.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

978
Q

When users log in to Salesforce, either via the user interface, the API, or a desktop client Salesforce CRM confirms the log in is authorized using all of the following EXCEPT:
A. Salesforce CRM then checks whether the user’s profile has IP address restrictions. If IP address restrictions are defined for the user’s profile, any login from an undesignated IP address is denied and any login from a specified IP address is allowed
B. If profile-based IP address restrictions aren’t set, then Salesforce CRM checks whether the user is logging in from an IP address she or he hasn’t used to access Salesforce CRM before
C. Salesforce CRM checks whether the organization has login hour restrictions. If login hour restrictions are specified, any login outside the specified hours is denied.
D. Salesforce CRM checks whether the user’s profile has login hour restrictions. If login hour restrictions are specified for the user’s profile, any login outside the specified hours is denied.

A

C. Salesforce CRM checks whether the organization has login hour restrictions. If login hour restrictions are specified, any login outside the specified hours is denied.

979
Q

Identify the statements that define Apex Data Loader:
A. Can be used to insert or extract SF records
B. Can be used to insert, update, delete, or extract SF records
C. Can be used only to update and delete SF records
D. Can be used to read,extract and load data from CSV
E. Can be used to read,extract and load data from any MS office file

A

B. Can be used to insert, update, delete, or extract SF records
D. Can be used to read,extract and load data from CSV

980
Q

Roll-up summary fields are not visible to users if they reference fields the user can’t see.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

981
Q

When creating a custom list view you can display fields that are not on your page layout for that object.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

982
Q

Which of the following statements is true about person accounts in backup exports?
A. If your organization uses person accounts and you’re exporting contacts, person account records are included in the contact data. However, the contact data only includes the fields shared by contacts and person accounts.
B. If your organization uses person accounts and you’re exporting contacts, person account records are not included in the contact data.
C. If your organization uses person accounts and you’re exporting contacts, person account records are included in the contact data. The export includes all fields from person accounts.

A

A. If your organization uses person accounts and you’re exporting contacts, person account records are included in the contact data. However, the contact data only includes the fields shared by contacts and person accounts.

983
Q

If you schedule a dashboard refresh on the 31st day of every month, will the dashboard refresh in months without a 31st day?
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

984
Q

You can create a custom report on solution categories and solution categories are available in list views.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

985
Q

I can access a “list view” of records by clicking on the leads, opportunities, or accounts tabs. I can also filter my list views so I can see exactly what I need.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

986
Q

Which of these is NOT true of list views in SF:
A. I can choose different list formats from the drop-down menu at the top of any list.
B. List views can only be created or customized by my administrator
C. List views are customizable, and I can create and customize my own views
D. I can change my list view format for any record type by choosing a view type from the drop-down-menu
E. I can drag and drop columns within my list view to change the appearance or order of data

A

B. List views can only be created or customized by my administrator

987
Q

The Open Calendar link below any list view can be clicked to display a view of my calendar. But, can I drag records from the list to time slots on the calendar to create events (sales calls, etc) for these records?
A. Yes
B. No

A

A. Yes

988
Q

Records & Record Detail Pages: I can edit data for multiple records at once by selecting each of them within a list view, clicking on one of the records, and choosing the field to edit for all.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

989
Q

Records & Record Detail Pages: SF lets me print list views for Accounts, Campaigns, Cases, Contacts, Leads, or Opportunities.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

990
Q

Records & Record Detail Pages: What is NOT true of hover links in SF?
A. Hover links can be found on record detail pages (for leads, opportunities, etc)
B. Top of page hover links often provide a summary of information found on the bottom of a page so I don’t have to scroll down to see important activity history, notes, etc
C. Just about every link in SFDC can be hovered over, and a summary window will pop-up.
D. When I hover over them, I begin to levitate in my chair
E. Hover links are cool and will save me some time when researching info about accounts, leads, opportunities, etc.

A

D. When I hover over them, I begin to levitate in my chair

991
Q

Adding Records: I must always search for a company or contact record BEFORE adding a new lead, opportunity, contact, or account into Salesforce.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

992
Q

Adding Records: If I add a duplicate record because I haven’t searched before adding a new one, the following events will be likely to happen:
A. The data quality in Salesforce.com will start to suck, and head office reports will no longer be accurate
B. I will complain when I inevitably end up adding notes or events to the wrong record
C. I will feel so guilty that I will be compelled to sign over my commissions to Bill, who needs more money to save homeless cats in the city of Boston
D. I will need to delete the duplicate record I have added, or merge the 2 duplicate records together.
E. All of the above

A

D. I will need to delete the duplicate record I have added, or merge the 2 duplicate records together.

993
Q

Adding & Searching for Records: Which search option allows me to search across multiple fields including notes, descriptions, and comments?
A. Advanced Search
B. Sidebar Search
C. Both

A

A. Advanced Search

994
Q

Editing Records: If I see a magnifying glass icon next to any field in SF, this means I can start typing into the field and matches will automatically appear to choose from. Or, I can click on the magnifying glass icon and look up data to fill the field with.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

995
Q

Editing Records: Which of these is NOT true? I can edit fields by:
A. Clicking the ‘Edit’ button within a record detail page
B. Double clicking within a field to add or edit data
C. Selecting multiple records within a list view and editing them all at once
D. Calling Bill and making him edit my fields for me

A

D. Calling Bill and making him edit my fields for me

996
Q
Editing Records: Required fields are marked by which color?
A. Blue
B. Green
C. Red
D. Black
A

C. Red

997
Q

Personalizing SF: If I want to update my personal info, email settings, etc. I have to:
A. Contact head office
B. Click ‘Set Up’ in SF and edit my info

A

B. Click ‘Set Up’ in SF and edit my info

998
Q

Here are the SF definitions of a Lead, Account, Contact, & Opportunity. Which one is the definition for an Opportunity?
A. Any person, organization or company that may be interested in your products and services, not yet customers. The Icon is a green Star Man.
B. An organization, individual or company involved with your business such as customers, competitors and partners that you wish to track in Salesforce. The Icon is a file folder.
C. Any individual or influencer associated with an account that you want to track in Salesforce. The Icon is a business card.
D. Any potential revenue-generating event (sales deal) that you want to track in Salesforce. The Icon is a Coin.

A

D. Any potential revenue-generating event (sales deal) that you want to track in Salesforce. The Icon is a Coin

999
Q
When I qualify a lead, the lead then automatically becomes: (Choose all that apply.)
A. An opportunity
B. An account
C. A contact
D. A campaign
A

A. An opportunity
B. An account
C. A contact

1000
Q

When I convert a lead to an Opportunity, I must give the opportunity a unique name so I know what it is (ex: Pacific Bank `” Red Package).
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

1001
Q

You are about to enter a new lead from a cold call into SF. What do you do first?
A. Search to determine if the company record already exists in Salesforce because you NEVER want to add duplicate data.
B. Start entering the new lead
C. Import the lead into SFDC using your Outlook email account

A

A. Search to determine if the company record already exists in Salesforce because you NEVER want to add duplicate data.

1002
Q

Accounts can be created by converting a lead to an opportunity, or by manual entry.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

1003
Q

Which will appear in your pipeline report?
A. Leads
B. Opportunities
C. Accounts

A

B. Opportunities

1004
Q

Which definition best describes accounts and their relationships with other record types in SF?
A. Accounts represent sales deals that your company is pursuing. An account may have only one opportunity associated with it.
B. Accounts are the backbone of information and represent prospective, existing, and former customers. An account may have multiple opportunities
C. Accounts are created after you have closed an opportunity or deal. An account must have a closed opportunity associated with it.

A

B. Accounts are the backbone of information and represent prospective, existing, and former customers. An account may have multiple opportunities

1005
Q

SF allows me to add a reporting hierarchy (or organization chart) to my contacts. This way I can better understand the structural dynamics within the businesses I am selling to, and remember who to contact for certain aspects of a sale.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

1006
Q

Select the option that is NOT true of the Stay In Touch feature in SF:
A. I can send single emails, or mass emails, to all of my existing accounts or prospects.
B. I can use this feature to update contact information in one click via email ג€” this keeps my customer data up to-date.
C. It rubs my feet before I go to bed each night.

A

C. It rubs my feet before I go to bed each night.

1007
Q

Select the option that is NOT true of opportunities:
A. I should use consistent naming conventions when identifying my opportunities (ex: Account Name ג€” Package offered)
B. Expected Revenue is automatically generated by multiplying the Amount field by the Probability Field (I do not need to add this figure)
C. Close Date should be the ג€bestג€ guess as to when I will close a deal
D. The amount field is not for the estimated amount of the sale, but dollar amount I will pay Bill Nuttall for processing my order.
E. Probability is the confidence factor that I will win the Opportunity, and is typically based on the Stage Value

A

D. The amount field is not for the estimated amount of the sale, but dollar amount I will pay Bill Nuttall for processing my order.

1008
Q

Task Records are “to-do” lists, are date sensitive, and must be completed before they move to my Activity History.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

1009
Q

Which option is NOT true of Events?
A. Events are scheduled events or meetings
B. Events are to-do lists
C. I can invite participants to an Event (like scheduling a demo, for example)
D. Events automatically move to Activity History when the time of the Event is past.

A

B. Events are to-do lists

1010
Q
Which one of these is NOT a recorded activity in SF?
A. Emails
B. Dials
C. Events
D. Tasks
E. Log a Call (after call completion)
A

B. Dials

1011
Q

I can email opportunities, accounts, leads, or contacts directly from SF, and all of these communications will be automatically saved in my activity history.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

1012
Q

I can merge 3 records at a time in SF to clean up dupe.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

1013
Q

Which of these is NOT true - It is possible to import my existing contacts from Outlook by:
A. Clicking ‘Set-Up’ and using the Import Wizard
B. Sending emails to myself
C. Connecting SF with Outlook and submitting contacts and leads to SF directly from my email

A

B. Sending emails to myself

1014
Q

What steps are part of the process to enable Multi-Currency in an organization?
A. Create a Sandbox
B. Contact Salesforce to enable multiple currencies
C. Enable Advanced Currency Management
D. Choose a default currency

A

B. Contact Salesforce to enable multiple currencies

D. Choose a default currency

1015
Q

You can only use standard fields when generating email and mail merge documents for leads or contacts.
A. True
B. False

A

B. False

1016
Q

Which of the following can be done on the Activity Settings page at Your Name | Setup | Customize | Activities | Activity Settings?
A. Enable Group Tasks.
B. Mass transfer activities.
C. Enable Email Tracking.
D. Show Event Details on Multi-User Calendar View.
E. Enable Email Attachements.
F. Change the Activities page layout.

A

A. Enable Group Tasks.
C. Enable Email Tracking.
D. Show Event Details on Multi-User Calendar View.

1017
Q
How many objects may be imported or updated using the Data Loader?
A. 1
B. 2
C. 3
D. 4
E. 5
F. 6
A

A. 1

1018
Q
Which of the following is inline editing not supported (More than 1 answer)?
A. System Fields
B. Case Stage
C. Related Lists
D. Contact Phone Number
E. List View
F. Read-Only Fields
A

A. System Fields
C. Related Lists
F. Read-Only Fields

1019
Q
What would you change if all of your online help was displayed in English and you wanted it to be German?
A. Default Language
B. Default Locale
C. Time Zone
D. Default Currency
A

A. Default Language

1020
Q
What are the methods to automate leads?
A. Web-To-Lead, Email Templates, Auto-response rules
B. Web-To-Lead, Auto-response rules
C. Email Templates, Auto-response rules
D. None of the Above
A

A. Web-To-Lead, Email Templates, Auto-response rules

1021
Q
To track revenue gain or loss based on currency fluctuations, you must implement
A. Multi-Currency
B. Sandbox
C. Territory Management
D. Advanced Currency Management
A

D. Advanced Currency Management

1022
Q

When importing Lead records you must use _______ Currency
A. An active or inactive
B. An active
C. An inactive

A

B. An active

1023
Q

Once you define a custom fiscal year structure, your company can not return to the standard fiscal year calendar.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

1024
Q

If you defined a custom fiscal year structure, your company can not revert to the Gregorian calendar for fiscal purposes.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

1025
Q

You can rename standard Tabs and Objects.
A. True
B. False

A

A. True

1026
Q

When a record is deleted it sits in the recycling bin for 30 days
A. True
B. False

A

B. False (When a record is deleted it sits in the recycling bin for 15 days)

1027
Q

When controlling and dependent fields are available in Connect Offline,
A. You will be able to edit one, with it automatically updating the other
B. The logic between them is not available
C. You can only edit the controlling field
D. You can only edit the dependent field

A

B. The logic between them is not available

1028
Q
What type of relationship should be built for a one-to-one (Choose 2 answers)?
A. Master-Detail Relationship
B. Look-up Relationship
C. Master-Detail Field
D. Look-up Field
A

B. Look-up Relationship

D. Look-up Field

1029
Q
When creating a Many-to-Many relationship, you will need to use a
A. Junction Object
B. Lookup Field
C. Sharing Rules
D. Workflow Field update
A

A. Junction Object

1030
Q
A Look-up field can look up to what?
A. An Object
B. A field
C. A record
D. A report
A

C. A record

1031
Q
When are custom fields removed from the recycle bin?
A. 15 days
B. 30 days
C. 60 days
D. 90 days
A

A. 15 days

1032
Q

Which administrative permissions are necessary in order to edit profiles?
A. Manage Users and Customize Application
B. View Setup and Configuration, Manage Users and Customize Application
C. View Setup and Configuration, Manage Users and Manage Profiles
D. Manage Profiles and Manage Users
E. View User Configuration, and Manage Users
F. View setup and Configuration, View User Configuration, Manage Users and Manage Profiles

A

B. View Setup and Configuration, Manage Users and Customize Application

1033
Q
Report are available in the following tab:
A. Home tab
B. Report Tab
C. Opp Tab
D. Account tab
E. Contacts Tab
A

B. Report Tab

1034
Q
Which of the following records can not be mass transferred?
A. Open Cases
B. Closed Cases
C. Open Activities
D. Closed Activities
A

D. Closed Activities

1035
Q
You can use inline editing to maintain all detail pages in the application except for:
A. Forecasts
B. Documents and Forecasts
C. Contacts
D. Documents
A

B. Documents and Forecasts

1036
Q
Through the Web-to-Case function, how is that case associated with a contact?
A. Contact name
B. Contact email
C. Account name
D. None of the above
A

B. Contact email

1037
Q
Data validation rules impact all supported objects except for:
A. Forecasts and Territories
B. Territories
C. Leads
D. Opportunities
A

A. Forecasts and Territories

1038
Q

Does access to folders respect the role hierarchy?
A. Yes
B. No

A

B. No

1039
Q

When creating users, does the alias need to be unique?
A. Yes
B. No

A

B. No

1040
Q

When using Territory Management, can an opportunity be associated with multiple territories?
A. Yes
B. No

A

B. No (Accounts and Users can be associated with multiple opportunities but Opportunities can ONLY be in one territory)

1041
Q

Do users have to display the jump page every time they create a new record?
A. Yes
B. No

A

B. No

1042
Q

If I’m looking at a detail page, do I know what record type it is?
A. Yes
B. No

A

B. No

1043
Q

Which tabs are restricted from multiple record types?
A. Home, Consoles, and Documents
B. Forecasts, Web tabs, and Leads
C. Leads, Forecasts, Home, and Reports
D. Home, Forecasts, Documents, Reports, Consoles and Web tabs

A

D. Home, Forecasts, Documents, Reports, Consoles and Web tabs

1044
Q
Before creating record types for Leads, Opportunities, Cases or Solutions, what do I need to create?
A. Business Approval Processes
B. Page Layout
C. Business Processes
D. UI
A

C. Business Processes

1045
Q
Which objects in the Org Wide Defaults allow me to do a public read/write/transfer?
A. Leads and Cases
B. Forecasts and Cases
C. Contracts and Forecasts
D. Leads and Contacts
A

A. Leads and Cases

1046
Q

Describe the components of the Console tab:
A. List View, Mini Page Layout, Frames, Detail Views
B. Frames, List View, Detail View, Mini View, Sidebar, Related Objects, Mini Page Layouts, Console Layout
C. Console Layout, Sidebar, Related Objects, Detail View, List View
D. Related Objects, Detail View, Frames, List View, Sidebar

A

B. Frames, List View, Detail View, Mini View, Sidebar, Related Objects, Mini Page Layouts, Console Layout

1047
Q
What do Business processes do?
A. Track sales and Provide Solutions
B. Assist cases only
C. Track sales and Offer support only
D. Track sales, Offer support, Provide solution, Assist cases
A

D. Track sales, Offer support, Provide solution, Assist cases

1048
Q
What are the Relative Dates in Report?
A. Today and Tomorrow 
B. Today and Yesterday
C. Today, Yesterday, and 1 Month Prior
D. Today, Tomorrow, Yesterday, Last week
A

D. Today, Tomorrow, Yesterday, Last week

1049
Q
Which three features can automatically create a Case? (Choose three.)
A. SMS-to-Case
B. Lightning for Outlook
C. Process Builder
D. Email-to-Case
E. Web-to-Case
A

C. Process Builder
D. Email-to-Case
E. Web-to-Case

1050
Q

Ursa Major Solar is using the content delivery feature of Salesforce Content.
What are two benefits of this feature? (Choose two.)
A. Associate the content delivery with a Salesforce record.
B. Use password protection for content deliveries that contain proprietary information.
C. Customize the URL assigned to the content delivery.
D. Encrypt certain content delivery files.

A

A. Associate the content delivery with a Salesforce record.

B. Use password protection for content deliveries that contain proprietary information.

1051
Q

Universal Containers sells their products to wholesale partners and retail outlets. Each process has its own set of unique sales stages.
Which three features can an administrator customize for each opportunity stage? (Choose three.)
A. Quota
B. Probability
C. Product Family
D. Forecast Category
E. Type

A

B. Probability
D. Forecast Category
E. Type

1052
Q

When opening a case with Salesforce support, the case requestor is asked to include the Organization ID of the org with the issue.
Where in Salesforce Setup will an Administrator find the Salesforce Org ID?
A. My Domain
B. Setup Home
C. Org Details
D. Company Information

A

D. Company Information

1053
Q

A user responsible for managing and creating campaigns is unable to create a new campaign, although the user’s profile has the Create profile permission for
Campaigns.
How should an administrator grant the correct access to the user?
A. Assign the user to the standard Marketing User profile.
B. Create a campaign sharing rule grant access to the user.
C. Grant the user delegated administration rights to campaigns.
D. Select the ‘Marketing User’ checkbox on the user record.

A

D. Select the ‘Marketing User’ checkbox on the user record.

1054
Q

What does campaign influence allow a user to do?
A. View the entire campaign hierarchy.
B. Report on the campaigns that have contributed to an opportunity.
C. Summarize campaign member statistics on a campaign.
D. Adjust the percentage of influence each campaign has on an opportunity.

A

B. Report on the campaigns that have contributed to an opportunity.

1055
Q

Universal Containers is having a quality control problem with one of its product lines.
Which standard object can be used to track the extent of the problem?
A. Account
B. Case
C. Product
D. Opportunity

A

B. Case

1056
Q
In which two ways should Knowledge articles be used? (Choose two.)
A. To display Salesforce Solutions
B. To display for customer self-service
C. To display Salesforce Answers
D. To resolve customer cases.
A

B. To display for customer self-service

D. To resolve customer cases.

1057
Q
Which three options are available when customizing a report? (Choose three.)
A. Summarize fields
B. Add a filter
C. Add a grouping
D. Add a gauge component
E. Schedule a refresh time
A

A. Summarize fields
B. Add a filter
C. Add a grouping

1058
Q

Which relationship can be selected in a custom report type where Accounts is the primary object and Contacts is the related object?
A. Each contact may or may not have a related account.
B. Each contact must have a related account.
C. Each account may or may not have related contacts.
D. Each account must not have related contacts.

A

C. Each account may or may not have related contacts.

1059
Q

Universal Containers has purchased additional licenses for five new sales representatives that will start in 30 days. The email accounts for the new representatives will not be active until they start. The new users should be set up ahead of time to assign records, list views, and other Salesforce utilities needed on the day they start.
Which method should a System Administrator use to set up the new users without sending a notification?
A. Create new users, and then set the start date for 30 days ahead.
B. Create new users, and then assign a permission set with a start date for 30 days ahead.
C. Create new users, and then Freeze the users.
D. Create new users, and uncheck Generate new password, and notify the user immediately.

A

A. Create new users, and then set the start date for 30 days ahead.

1060
Q
Which object must be related in order to create an Opportunity record?
A. Account
B. Quote
C. Contact
D. Lead
A

A. Account

1061
Q

A user profile gas login hour restrictions set to Monday through Friday, 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. The user logged in at 4:30 p.m. on a Tuesday and it is now 5:01 p.m.
Which application behavior should the user expect?
A. The user will be able to continue working and start new sessions.
B. The user will be logged out and any unsaved work-in-process will be saved.
C. The user will be logged out and any unsaved work-in-process will be lost.
D. The user will be able to continue working, but will be unable to start any new sessions.

A

C. The user will be logged out and any unsaved work-in-process will be lost.

1062
Q

Universal Containers has a private sharing model for Opportunities and uses Opportunity Teams. Criteria-based sharing rules are not used. A sales rep at
Universal Containers leaves the company and their user record is deactivated. The rep is later rehired in the same rile. The Salesforce administrator activates the old user record. The user is added to the same default Opportunity Teams, but is no longer able to see the same records the user worked on before leaving the company.
What is the likely cause?
A. The records were manually shared with the user.
B. The Stage of the Opportunity records was changed to Closed Lost.
C. Permission sets were removed when the user was deactivated.
D. The Record Type of the Opportunity records was changed.

A

A. The records were manually shared with the user.

1063
Q
Ursa Major Solar needs to ensure compliance with a platinum Service Level Agreement cases that remain in the Tier 2 queue for more than four hours must be re- assigned to the Tier 3 queue.
Which feature meet this requirement?
A. Case Comments
B. Case Assignment Rule
C. Case Escalation Rule
D. Auto Response Rule
A

C. Case Escalation Rule

1064
Q
Which two dashboards components should display data from the summary rows of a report? (Choose two.)
A. Metric
B. Chart
C. Gauge
D. Table
A

B. Chart

D. Table

1065
Q
Where does an Administrator control field-level security for users?
A. Role
B. User
C. Profile
D. Sharing Rule
A

C. Profile

1066
Q

Universal Containers has purchased 25 new Salesforce licenses.
How many users can a System Administrator create at the same time on the Add Multiple Users page?
A. An unlimited number of users.
B. A maximum of 5 users.
C. A maximum of 25 users.
D. A maximum of 10 users.

A

D. A maximum of 10 users.

1067
Q

All Salesforce users at Universal Containers are using the predefined actions. Several new actions have been created for different departments and are waiting to be assigned to the users in these departments.
Where does a System Administrator override the predefined actions, create a new customized set of actions, and assign the new customized action layout?
A. Record Types
B. Publisher Layouts
C. Global Actions
D. Permission Sets

A

B. Publisher Layouts

1068
Q
The Support team has asked the Administrator to create a guided process that allows the rep to use scripted screens to collect the appropriate information.
Which tool should the Administrator use?
A. Cloud Flow Designer
B. Approval Process
C. Workflow Rule
D. Process Builder
A

A. Cloud Flow Designer

1069
Q

Which circumstance will prevent a system administrator from deleting a custom field?
A. The field is used in a page layout.
B. The field is part of a filed dependency.
C. The field is used in a workflow field update.
D. The filed is used in a report.

A

C. The field is used in a workflow field update.

1070
Q

The support team at Universal Containers wants to be more proactive about renewing support plans with customers. They would like the support representative dedicated to each account to be notified a month before the account’s support plan expires.
What should an administrator configure to meet this requirement?
A. Assignment rule
B. Workflow rule
C. Auto-response rule
D. Escalation rule

A

B. Workflow rule

1071
Q

Sales Managers want to capture an additional email address for Contact records.
Which field property will ensure the proper format?
A. Data Type
B. Default Value
C. Field-level Security
D. Validation Rule

A

A. Data Type

1072
Q

Universal Containers has activated Web-to-Case on their corporate website. IT configured Auto-Response to thank the customer for logging the case and activated Assignment Rules based on the state (USA) in which the customer resides. Case ownership is therefore determined and routed to the corresponding queue - North, South, East, or West. Customer Cases do not meet the existing criteria should be assigned to Queue - World.
Which solution will satisfy this requirement?
A. Using a Trigger, change the owner of Cases outside the US to Queue - World.
B. In an Active Case Flow, change the name of the Queue to World.
C. In Case Support Settings, change Default Case Owner to Queue - World.
D. Using a Workflow Rule, change the owner of new Cases outside the US to Queue - World.

A

C. In Case Support Settings, change Default Case Owner to Queue - World.

1073
Q

Which two statements about products and price books are true? (Choose two.)
A. Price books that contain assets cannot contain products.
B. The standard and list price for a product can be listed in multiple currencies.
C. Products without a price are automatically added to the standard price book.
D. A product can have a different list price in different price books.

A

B. The standard and list price for a product can be listed in multiple currencies.
D. A product can have a different list price in different price books.

1074
Q

Universal Containers (UC) has a Web-to-Case form on its Lightning Customer Community. UC wants to separate Cases into the following product categories:
Corrugated Paper, Plastic, Fiberboard, and Metal. UC has added a picklist field to store this data.
How can the Case be automatically placed in the correct queue upon submission?
A. Create Record Types for each picklist value and a Business Process to move each Case to the correct Queue.
B. Create Assignment Rules based on the picklist values to move Cases to a Queue.
C. Create an Escalation Rule entry for each picklist value and set to zero minutes.
D. Create Record Types for each picklist value and assign to each product team’s profile.

A

B. Create Assignment Rules based on the picklist values to move Cases to a Queue.

1075
Q

What are three considerations when a user is importing data via Data Loader? (Choose three.)
A. Importing data into checkbox fields allows for use of TRUE/FALSE.
B. Field-Level Security access determines which fields will be visible.
C. Restricted picklists, a new picklist value will be ignored and the default value applied.
D. Validation rules do not execute when importing data.
E. Unrestricted picklist, a new picklist value will be applied but will not be added to the picklist.

A

A. Importing data into checkbox fields allows for use of TRUE/FALSE.
B. Field-Level Security access determines which fields will be visible.
E. Unrestricted picklist, a new picklist value will be applied but will not be added to the picklist.

1076
Q

Users are trying to create Opportunities and are receiving errors when populating a custom picklist field. When users select either of the values in the picklist, they receive different error messages above the field and are not able to save the Opportunities.
What is the likely cause of the error?
A. The users don’t have access to the Large Enterprise Record Type.
B. There are contradicting validation rules on the picklist field.
C. The users don’t have access to the picklist filed.
D. The two picklist values are unavailable to the Record Type.

A

B. There are contradicting validation rules on the picklist field.

1077
Q

Support agents at Universal Containers research solutions to customer issues by asking various subject matter experts (SMEs) at the company.
Which three features will allow Support Agents to quickly document the details of these meetings? (Choose three.)
A. Case Feed
B. Workflow Email Alerts
C. Case Group
D. Case Comments
E. Events

A

A. Case Feed
B. Workflow Email Alerts
D. Case Comments

1078
Q

Ursa Major Solar wants to use the Salesforce approval process.
What are two characteristics that make a sales process a good fit for the Salesforce approval process? (Choose two.)
A. There are approvals for all Opportunities by a Sales VP where a Sales VP is allowed to delegate their approval to someone else.
B. The first level approval can be denied and automatically routed to the Sales VP for final approval.
C. The approval manager is randomly assigned from a public group of managers, and there is a second approval by the Sales VP.
D. There is an approval to a queue member for all Opportunities and an additional approval by a Sales VP for Opportunities over a certain amount.

A

A. There are approvals for all Opportunities by a Sales VP where a Sales VP is allowed to delegate their approval to someone else.
D. There is an approval to a queue member for all Opportunities and an additional approval by a Sales VP for Opportunities over a certain amount.

1079
Q

Ursa Major Solar (UMS) is configuring the lead conversion process.
Which two factors should UMS consider before setting up the process? (Choose two.)
A. Roll-up summary lead fields can be mapped to custom contact fields.
B. Custom lead fields can be mapped to account, contact, and opportunity fields.
C. Custom lead fields can be mapped to custom object fields.
D. Standard lead fields are automatically converted to account, contact, and opportunity fields.

A

B. Custom lead fields can be mapped to account, contact, and opportunity fields.
D. Standard lead fields are automatically converted to account, contact, and opportunity fields.

1080
Q

Universal Containers has two business groups, Products and Services. Both groups will be using opportunities to track deals, but different fields are required by each group.
In which two ways should an administrator meet this requirement? (Choose two.)
A. Create two permission sets.
B. Create two page layouts
C. Create two lead processes.
D. Create two record types.

A

B. Create two page layouts

D. Create two record types.

1081
Q

The Support Manager wants to send an automatic email to the Case Contact when a case is closed.
Which automation tool can the System Administrator use?
A. Sharing Rule
B. Validation Rule
C. Workflow Rule
D. Case Auto-Response Rule

A

C. Workflow Rule

1082
Q

A company has a complicated Sales process regarding its opportunities. The company has three different lines of business (Widget A, Widget B, Widget C) that each contain fields specific to that line of business’s industry and customers. For each line of business, there is a specific set of fields that Sales users should see and a different set of fields that Marketing users should see.
How should an Administrator configure Page Layouts and Record Types for the Opportunity object so that each team sees what it needs to see, without cluttered layouts containing unnecessary fields?
A. Create six Record Types (Sales Widget A, Sales Widget B, Sales Widget C, Marketing Widget A, Marketing Widget B, and Marketing Widget C) with one Page Layout.
B. Create six Record Types (Sales Widget A, Sales Widget B, Sales Widget C, Marketing Widget A, Marketing Widget B, and Marketing Widget C) with six total Page Layouts, one for each Record Type.
C. Create one Record Type with six Page Layouts (Sales Widget A, Sales Widget B, Sales Widget C, Marketing Widget A, Marketing Widget B, and Marketing Widget C).
D. Create three Record Types (Widget A, Widget B, Widget C) with six Page Layouts (Sales Widget A, Sales Widget B, Sales Widget C, Marketing Widget A, Marketing Widget B, and Marketing Widget C).

A

D. Create three Record Types (Widget A, Widget B, Widget C) with six Page Layouts (Sales Widget A, Sales Widget B, Sales Widget C, Marketing Widget A, Marketing Widget B, and Marketing Widget C).

1083
Q

The sales manager at Universal Containers wants three users to have Read and Edit access to Campaigns.
How should the Administrator fulfill this requirement?
A. Add Read and Edit access for Campaigns to the Sales User profile.
B. Create a Permission Set with Read and Edit access for Campaigns.
C. Assign users to a System Administrator profile to provide full access.
D. Clone the Sales User profile and set up Read and Edit access for Campaigns.

A

B. Create a Permission Set with Read and Edit access for Campaigns.

1084
Q

Universal Containers wants sales reps to see the industry, annual revenue, and account owner at a glance on their mobile device. This information should be located at the top of the account record.
Which feature should the administrator configure to meet this requirement?
A. Field Set
B. Page Layout
C. Compact Layout
D. Mobile Card

A

C. Compact Layout

1085
Q

Universal Containers has decided to offer a partner its products at a discounted rate applied to all opportunities.
What should the Administrator do to make sure the appropriate prices are applied to products on opportunities for this partner?
A. Create a custom object for the discounted products.
B. Create a new discount Record Type on the Products object.
C. Create a new list price on the Standard Price Book.
D. Create a custom Price Book with the discounted list prices.

A

D. Create a custom Price Book with the discounted list prices.

1086
Q

When working on opportunities, sales representatives at Universal Containers need to understand how their peers have successfully managed other opportunities with comparable products, competing against the same competitors.
Which two features should an administrator use to facilitate this? (Choose two.)
A. Big deal alerts
B. Opportunity update reminders
C. Chatter groups
D. Opportunity Dashboard

A

C. Chatter groups

D. Opportunity Dashboard

1087
Q

Universal Containers has a private sharing model on Opportunities. The System Administrator has been asked to create a new custom object that will track customer payment information and will link to the Opportunity. Only those users with access to the Opportunity should be able to see the records on the new object.
What should the Administrator do to accomplish this task?
A. Create a lookup relationship with Profile permissions.
B. Create a Master-Detail relationship with Profile permissions.
C. Create a Master-Detail relationship with a Criteria Based Sharing Rule.
D. Create a Lookup relationship with a Criteria Based Sharing Rule.

A

B. Create a Master-Detail relationship with Profile permissions.

1088
Q

A marketing user has received a file of leads to import into Salesforce.
Which tool can be used to avoid duplicate lead records?
A. Data Import Wizard
B. Data loader
C. Merge leads function
D. Validation rules

A

A. Data Import Wizard

1089
Q
Which two groups of objects can be created when converting a Lead? (Choose two.)
A. Account, Contact, Lead Conversion
B. Account, Contact, Opportunity
C. Account, Opportunity, Order
D. Person Account, Opportunity
A

B. Account, Contact, Opportunity

D. Person Account, Opportunity

1090
Q
What are three features of Chatter? (Choose three.)
A. Events
B. Bookmarks
C. Notes
D. Feeds
E. Recommendations
A

B. Bookmarks
D. Feeds
E. Recommendations

1091
Q

How can an administrator capture custom lead data on the converted contact when converting a lead?
A. Map custom lead fields to standard contact fields.
B. Map custom lead fields to custom contact fields.
C. Use the data loader to move the custom lead data.
D. Use the lead conversion wizard to select the fields.

A

B. Map custom lead fields to custom contact fields.

1092
Q

A Universal Containers (UC) Administrator has created a new Lightning record page for the Sales team to display a report chart embedded on the Account page.
There are no Record Types for Account at this time.
Which step should the Administrator take to make this page the default view of the UC app for the Sales team without impacting the Support team?
A. Create an Account Record Type and make the page the default object record page.
B. Make the page the default object record page for the UC app for the Sales profile.
C. Make the page the default object record page for the UC app.
D. make the page the org default.

A

B. Make the page the default object record page for the UC app for the Sales profile.

1093
Q

Universal Containers has two sales groups. Each group has its own unique sales process.
How can an administrator ensure that sales representatives have access to only the stages relevant to their process when working on opportunities?
A. Multi-select picklists
B. Record types
C. Page layouts
D. Roles

A

B. Record types

1094
Q

A sales executive at Universal Containers wants to be notified whenever high-value opportunities are created for hot accounts.
What should an administrator do to meet this requirement?
A. Create an escalation rule based on the opportunity amount.
B. Create a workflow rule on the opportunity object.
C. Create a validation rule that evaluates the account rating.
D. Creating an auto-response rule on the opportunity object.

A

B. Create a workflow rule on the opportunity object.

1095
Q

Ursa Major Solar has selected report folders that are shared with a small group of users who are on Lightning Experience.
The System Administrator needs to prevent these users from customizing the information in the reports.
What should the System Administrator do to achieve this goal?
A. Lock report filters.
B. Change Field Level Security.
C. Utilize Custom Report Types.
D. Run the report as a specified user.

A

A. Lock report filters.

1096
Q

Universal Containers has a custom object named Feedback which is used to capture Users’ candid comments about their experiences at work. The sales team manager and all representatives have roles in the role hierarchy with sales representatives directly under the sales team manager. HR requires that all feedback records be private to each User. Managers should not have access to subordinates’ Feedback records.
Which action should an administrator take to ensure this requirement is met?
A. Confirm Feedback object is set to Private and Uncheck ‘Grant Access Using Hierarchies’ in Organization-wide sharing.
B. Confirm Feedback object is set to Private and Uncheck ‘Enable Role Hierarchy’ in Organization-wide sharing.
C. Confirm Feedback object is set to Restricted and Uncheck ‘Enable Role Hierarchy’ in Organization-wide sharing.
D. Confirm Feedback object is set to Restricted and Uncheck ‘Grant Access Using Hierarchies’ in Organization-wide sharing.

A

A. Confirm Feedback object is set to Private and Uncheck ‘Grant Access Using Hierarchies’ in Organization-wide sharing.

1097
Q

Sales representatives at Universal Containers often schedule in-person meetings at customer offices. Management wants to track activities for this meeting category to clearly display customer office meetings in the Account, Contact, or Opportunity page layouts, as well as adding this data to reports.
Which method should a System Administrator use to solve this business request?
A. Add a new value to the Type field on Tasks used for Accounts, Contacts, and Opportunities.
B. Have the user manually enter the meeting details in the Account Comments.
C. Add a new value to the Type field on Accounts, Contacts, and Opportunities.
D. Have the user manually enter the meeting details in the Description field on Accounts, Contacts, and Opportunities.

A

A. Add a new value to the Type field on Tasks used for Accounts, Contacts, and Opportunities.

1098
Q

Universal Containers needs to synchronize data between Salesforce and an external financial system.
What should an administrator do to accomplish this?
A. use the data loader to match records between the systems.
B. Use an external ID field to match records between the systems.
C. use the Excel connector to export records from both systems onto Excel.
D. Use the data loader to match Salesforce records with the financial system.

A

B. Use an external ID field to match records between the systems.

1099
Q

What are two capabilities of Customer Communities? (Choose two.)
A. Customers can view and edit contacts related to their own accounts.
B. The Customer Community and its users can be created without additional licensing.
C. Customers can log, view, edit, and close their own cases.
D. The Customer Community can be customized with corporate branding.

A

C. Customers can log, view, edit, and close their own cases.

D. The Customer Community can be customized with corporate branding.

1100
Q

A previous Administrator is no longer at Universal Containers, but still owns many records and is the Default Workflow user.
Which security measure should the new Administrator take?
A. Delete the previous Administrator user.
B. Reset the password for the previous Administrator user.
C. Freeze the previous Administrator user.
D. Deactivate the previous Administrator user.

A

C. Freeze the previous Administrator user.

1101
Q

A manager has a new report folder called Awesome Team Reports to store the reports that are relevant for the team. The manager wants to let the team lead add new reports to the folder and share access to the folder with the rest of the team.
Which level of access to the folder does the team lead need in order to complete this task?
A. Editor
B. Manager
C. Administrator
D. Viewer

A

B. Manager

1102
Q
A Lightning for Outlook layout can be assigned to which two options? (Choose two.)
A. Team
B. User
C. Profile
D. Role
A

B. User

C. Profile

1103
Q
What do field administrators use when creating a junction object?
A. Formula
B. Look-up
C. Master-detail
D. Text area
A

C. Master-detail

1104
Q

Universal Containers wants to back-up Salesforce data on a monthly basis.
Which set of tools can a system administrator use to meet this requirement?
A. Data Export Service, Reporting Snapshots, Einstein Analytics
B. Data Export Service, Data Loader, Report Export
C. Data Loader, Scheduled Report, Reporting Snapshot
D. Data loader, Reporting Snapshot, Report Export

A

B. Data Export Service, Data Loader, Report Export

1105
Q

The Administrator has created new users for 10 new employees at Universal Containers.
Why are these users unable to access the Account Object in the Salesforce org?
A. Organization-Wide Defaults are set to Private.
B. Users’ Profile requires permission to the Account object.
C. Users’ Roles are low on the Role Hierarchy.
D. Users’ Profile requires a Sharing Rule Accounts.

A

B. Users’ Profile requires permission to the Account object.

1106
Q

A Sales Manager wants all Sales Users in the department to see a Dashboard that displays Total Closed/Won Opportunity Amount by User on a monthly basis.
The Opportunity sharing model is private.
How can the Administrator meet this requirement?
A. Create the Dashboard from the Opportunities by User Report, then save in the shared Dashboard Folder as a Dynamic Dashboard.
B. Create the Dashboard from the Opportunities by User Report, select the Sales Manager as RunAs User and save in the private Dashboard Folder.
C. Ask the Sales Manager to create the Dashboard from the Opportunities by User Report and save it to her private Dashboard Folder.
D. Ask the Sales Manager to create the Dashboard from the Opportunities by User Report, select ג€View Dashboard as Meג€ and save in the shared Dashboard Folder.

A

A. Create the Dashboard from the Opportunities by User Report, then save in the shared Dashboard Folder as a Dynamic Dashboard.

1107
Q

Sales Rep and Sales Rep B view an Account report for all Accounts without any filters. The company uses a private sharing model. Each rep sees a different number of results.
What is the explanation for the discrepancy in the reports?
A. Sales Rep B needs to be assigned to the Sales Rep role.
B. Sales Rep B needs to be assigned to the Sales Rep queue.
C. Sales Rep B needs to be assigned to the Sales Rep permission set.
D. Sales Rep B needs to be assigned to the Sales Rep profile.

A

A. Sales Rep B needs to be assigned to the Sales Rep role.

1108
Q

What are two purposes of the AppExchange? (Choose two.)
A. Partners can download accounts and contacts to collaborate on sales deals.
B. Support users can install the Salesforce Console for Service custom app.
C. Customers can share and install apps published by Salesforce partners.
D. Administrators can download and customize pre-built dashboards and reports.

A

C. Customers can share and install apps published by Salesforce partners.
D. Administrators can download and customize pre-built dashboards and reports.

1109
Q

The Administrator at Ursa Major Solar needs to provide information for Total Salesforce Licenses, Used Licenses, and the Remaining Salesforce licenses.
Where is Setup can this information be found?
A. Company Information
B. Users
C. Profiles
D. Critical Updates

A

A. Company Information

1110
Q

Ursa Major Solar users want to utilize Salesforce Knowledge.
Which statement accurately describes Knowledge?
A. An automated tool that closes Cases based on historical information.
B. A knowledge base comprised of articles that can be written and utilized by support agents.
C. An automated Machine Learning tool that converts Leads to Opportunities given a predefined set of conditions.
D. A knowledge base that uses Machine Learning to generate an article to solve customer support issues.

A

B. A knowledge base comprised of articles that can be written and utilized by support agents.

1111
Q

Ursa Major Solar has a social marketing team set up as a public group. A sales representative would like to engage the social marketing team on one opportunity.
What should the sales representative do to ensure the social marketing team can access the opportunity?
A. Change the opportunity owner to the public group.
B. Manually share the record with the public group.
C. Add the public group to an opportunity queue.
D. Add the public group to the opportunity team.

A

B. Manually share the record with the public group.

1112
Q

The managers at Ursa Major Solar asked the Administrator to quickly provide access to sales reports and dashboards. How can this be done?
A. Use the Salesforce Auto-Report Builder.
B. Log a case to Salesforce Support.
C. Build reports and dashboards.
D. Search the AppExchange for free adoption report apps.

A

D. Search the AppExchange for free adoption report apps.

1113
Q

Ursa Major Solar is importing data and has many records that do NOT meet the data validation criteria. What will occur?
A. The import process will require user authentication in order to import the invalid records.
B. The import process will ignore the data validation criteria.
C. The import process will abort when it encounters the first invalid record.
D. The import process will fail, but only for the records with invalid data.

A

D. The import process will fail, but only for the records with invalid data.

1114
Q

Ursa Major Solar’s default, organization-wide sharing for accounts is set to Public Read/Write. The Administrator needs to ensure that Marketing never modifies an Account record.
Which action should the Administrator take to accomplish this goal?
A. Assign a permission set to Marketing users which removes Edit permission.
B. Separate the Marketing role hierarchy from the Sales role hierarchy.
C. Remove Edit access on Accounts from the custom Marketing profile.
D. Switch Organization-Wide Default Sharing to Public Read Only.

A

C. Remove Edit access on Accounts from the custom Marketing profile.

1115
Q

Which two actions should an Administrator perform to provide a sales team with an easy solution for gathering customer requirements and sharing presentations with their customers? (Choose two.)
A. Use Salesforce Files to post presentations in Chatter.
B. Add customers to private Chatter groups.
C. Add customers to libraries.
D. Ensure opportunity teams are created for customers.

A

A. Use Salesforce Files to post presentations in Chatter.

B. Add customers to private Chatter groups.

1116
Q
Which three can be modified on standard fields? (Choose three.)
A. Picklist values
B. Help text
C. Field type
D. Label
E. Default text
A

A. Picklist values
B. Help text
D. Label

1117
Q
What can an Administrator use to create different content pages for a FAQ and a Help Article for the support team?
A. Knowledge article versions
B. Knowledge data categories
C. Knowledge article record types
D. Knowledge article types
A

C. Knowledge article record types

1118
Q
Campaign Member can be associated with which two objects? (Choose two.)
A. Contact
B. Lead
C. Opportunity
D. Account
A

A. Contact

B. Lead

1119
Q

The head of marketing at Ursa Major Solar uses a spreadsheet of email addresses obtained from the company website. The Administrator needs to ensure that this spreadsheet stays updated by using the Data Import Wizard.
Which set of fields are required to update the contact with the new email address?
A. Contact ID and Account ID
B. Contact Name and Account ID
C. User ID and Account ID
D. Contact Email Address and Account ID

A

A. Contact ID and Account ID

1120
Q

A Sales executive at Universal Containers (UC) is utilizing Collaborative Forecasting to track sales rep quote attainment and wants to be alerted when an
Opportunity Stage is moved backward in the sales process.
Which feature should the Administrator use to fulfill this request?
A. Field History Tracking report
B. Big Deal Alert
C. Validation Rule
D. Workflow Rule

A

D. Workflow Rule

1121
Q

An Administrator needs to configure Ursa Major Solar’s Salesforce Mobile app with the company’s brand-specific images and color schemes.
Which set of branding options should the Administrator use?
A. Individual Page Colors, Multiple Loading Page Logos
B. Tab Colors, Action Colors, Loading Page Logo
C. Loading Page Color, Action Colors, Loading Page Logo
D. Loading Page Logo, Brand Color, Loading Page Color

A

D. Loading Page Logo, Brand Color, Loading Page Color

1122
Q

Ursa Major Solar (UMS) wants to assign a Lightning for Outlook layout.
Which two options can UMS assign this layout to? (Choose two.)
A. Team
B. Profile
C. User
D. Role

A

B. Profile

C. User

1123
Q
Ursa Major Solar tracks both user issues and customer issues.
A user issue can be logged as:
✑ new
✑ waiting for reply
✑ closed
A user issue can be logged as:
✑ new
✑ working
✑ closed
An Administrator needs to track both case types.
Which features should be used?
A. Record Types and Support Processes
B. Page Layouts and Process Builder
C. Workflows and Automated Case Users
D. Page Layouts and Record Types
A

A. Record Types and Support Processes

1124
Q

Ursa Major Solar is bringing a new type of solar panel to market. An Administrator needs to create a Sales Process for this new product.
What are three considerations for the Administrator in this scenario? (Choose three.)
A. The Record Type’s Page Layout is assigned to Users through their Profile assignments.
B. All Picklist values on the Page Layout must be added to the Master Picklist Value List or be active values.
C. An Opportunity Record Type will need to be created and assigned to the Sales Process.
D. The Record Type Name assignment becomes permanent upon Save of a new Record Type.
E. Adding a new value to the Record Type Master Picklist Value List adds the value to all existing Record Type picklists.

A

A. The Record Type’s Page Layout is assigned to Users through their Profile assignments.
B. All Picklist values on the Page Layout must be added to the Master Picklist Value List or be active values.
C. An Opportunity Record Type will need to be created and assigned to the Sales Process.

1125
Q
Which setting on a profile makes a tab NOT accessible in the All App Launcher or visible in any app, but still allows a user to view records that would normally be found under this tab?
A. Tab Settings
B. App Permissions
C. Object Permissions
D. Org-wide Defaults
A

A. Tab Settings

1126
Q

Previous Ursa Major Solar sales representatives worked on approximately 180 Accounts with billing addresses in California. These sales representatives need to retain viewing and editing access to these accounts for 1-3 months.
An Administrator needs to easily provide View and Edit access to these users for the 180 accounts.
What should the Administrator do to achieve this goal?
A. Configure a new Profile for these users with criteria based on Billing State equals California.
B. Configure a new Account Sharing Rule for these users with criteria based on Billing State equals California.
C. Configure a new Account folder for these users with criteria based on Billing State equals California.
D. Configure a new Account Sharing Rule for the Sales Representative Profile with criteria based on Billing State equals California.

A

B. Configure a new Account Sharing Rule for these users with criteria based on Billing State equals California.

1127
Q

Ursa Major Solar has an opportunity record with a close date of November 15, which fulfills the criteria of a time-dependent workflow rule. The time-dependent action is scheduled for November 8.
The opportunity is edited before November 8, however, and no longer meets the criteria.
What happens to the time-dependent action?
A. It will execute on November 15.
B. It will execute on November 8.
C. It is automatically removed from the queue.
D. It is put on hold.

A

C. It is automatically removed from the queue.

1128
Q

A senior realtor at Ursa Major Solar has received a long list of new residential homes to sell to for the spring. Management needs the spreadsheet of the new residential homes and a separate spreadsheet of pricebooks loaded into Salesforce.
Which Salesforce data tool will meet this request?
A. Data Loader
B. Mass Transfer Records
C. Data Import Wizard
D. Mass Create Records

A

A. Data Loader

1129
Q

Ursa Major Solar is looking into backup methods.
Which set of small and large data backup methods are available in native Salesforce?
A. Mass Export Wizard, Weekly Data Export Service, and Data Loader Exports
B. Report Exports, Dashboards Exports, and Weekly Data Export Service
C. Data Loader Exports, Report Exports, and Weekly Data Export Service
D. Data Loader Exports, Mass Exports, and Weekly Data Export Service

A

C. Data Loader Exports, Report Exports, and Weekly Data Export Service

1130
Q

A company needs its customer service agents to collect and display different information on Case records based on whether customers are calling in with a question, product suggestion, or complaint.
Which three features should the System Administrator use to meet this goal? (Choose three.)
A. Field level security
B. Page layouts
C. Permission sets
D. Record types
E. Support processes

A

B. Page layouts
D. Record types
E. Support processes

1131
Q

A Salesforce Administrator is creating a new user.
What should the Administrator consider when selecting the Username?
A. It must be alphanumeric and be unique across all Salesforce organizations.
B. It must be alphanumeric and unique to the organization.
C. It must look like an email address and be unique across all Salesforce organizations.
D. It must look like an email address and be unique to the organization.

A

C. It must look like an email address and be unique across all Salesforce organizations.

1132
Q

An administrator at Ursa Major Solar is setting up Case Feed.
What should the Administrator consider?
A. Chatter Feed tracking must be enabled for the case object.
B. The Use Case Feed permission is automatically active for all profiles.
C. The Service Cloud User feature license is required for Case Feed.
D. By default, the Case Feed replaces the standard case detail page.

A

A. Chatter Feed tracking must be enabled for the case object.

1133
Q
Dashboard components can be sorted by how many levels?
A. 4
B. 2
C. 1
D. 5
A

B. 2

1134
Q

An Administrator at Ursa Major Solar (UMS) needs to create a new user.
When creating a username, which two considerations need to be taken in to account? (Choose two.)
A. Username is added to the Active User Log.
B. Username must be unique across all Salesforce orgs.
C. Username needs to be in the format of an Email Address.
D. Username matches to the User’s Email address.

A

B. Username must be unique across all Salesforce orgs.

C. Username needs to be in the format of an Email Address.

1135
Q

Ursa Major Solar’s administrator created a new account record type, but when marketing users are creating new account records, they are unable to choose the new record type.
What are two potential causes of this issue? (Choose two.)
A. The record type is disassociated from the page layout.
B. The record type is disabled on the marketing user profile.
C. The record type default setting is disabled.
D. The record type is deactivated.

A

B. The record type is disabled on the marketing user profile.
D. The record type is deactivated.

1136
Q

Ursa Major Solar has the following environment and requirements:
✑ Critical, high-priority accounts have an assigned District Manager, Sales Representative, Inside Sales Representative, and Customer Service Representative.
✑ The Sales Manager wants to prevent these accounts from being inadvertently contacted more than once on the same day.
✑ The Sales Manager wants to report on various customer interactions.

How should the Administrator fulfill these requirements?
A. Log a separate Task, Call, or Activity on the Account.
B. Enter comments into the Notes section on the Account.
C. Log a case on the Account.
D. Post customer interactions in Chatter on the Account.

A

A. Log a separate Task, Call, or Activity on the Account.

1137
Q

Ursa Major Solar recently acquired a company whose Sales team has a unique sales process, with stages that are different from the current setup of stages in
Salesforce.
The Chief Technology Officer (CTO) has decided that the new Sales team should NOT change their process at all.
What should the Administrator do to incorporate the new Sales team’s process?
A. Create new values for the Opportunity Stage field; create a new Sales Process assigned to a custom Record Type for the new Sales team.
B. Create a Record Type and page layout for the new Sales team and a custom field for the new Stages.
C. Create new values for the Opportunity Stage field and use field-level security to control which teams see which fields.
D. Create new values for the Opportunity Stage field; order them so that the new Sales team’s values are at the bottom of the picklist.

A

B. Create a Record Type and page layout for the new Sales team and a custom field for the new Stages.

1138
Q

Ursa Major Solar has the following environment and requirements:
✑ A new custom object named Regulations is a child of the Account object.
✑ All users need the ability to view Regulations when viewing Accounts with the Sales Account Page Layout.
How should a Salesforce Administrator provide access to Regulations on the Sales Account Page Layout?
A. By adding a new custom link for Regulations__c to the Sales Account Page Layout
B. By adding a new section for Regulations__c to the Sales Account Page Layout
C. By adding a new related list for Regulations__c to the Sales Account Page Layout
D. By adding a new action for Regulations__c to the Sales Account Page Layout

A

C. By adding a new related list for Regulations__c to the Sales Account Page Layout

1139
Q
Which two objects can an Administrator customize the Stage Setup Flow? (Choose two.)
A. Leads
B. Opportunities
C. Campaigns
D. Campaign Members
A

A. Leads

B. Opportunities

1140
Q
What are two ways to customize basic Salesforce Reports using Lightning Experience? (Choose two.)
A. By adding a chart
B. By adding a filter
C. By adding a Lightning Component
D. By adding links to external pages
A

A. By adding a chart

B. By adding a filter

1141
Q

At Universal Containers, a user’s department determines which fields the user can see and edit on Opportunities. For example, users on the Sales team can edit all fields on the Opportunity, while users on the Support team have read-only access to these fields.
In which location is field-level security controlled for users on these teams?
A. Role
B. Sharing Rules
C. Profile
D. Public Groups

A

C. Profile

1142
Q

What are two considerations for the Org Recycle Bin? (Choose two.)
A. You can restore reports and dashboards.
B. Deleted records remain in the recycle bin for 15 days.
C. Records are permanently deleted when using the ‘Delete’ button.
D. Records in the Recycle Bin count against your org’s storage usage.

A

A. You can restore reports and dashboards.

B. Deleted records remain in the recycle bin for 15 days.

1143
Q

Users at Universal Containers need the ability to save email templates in the following folder:
Unified Public Email Templates
Currently, users are unable to do so.
Which action should a System Administrator take to allow users to save emails to this folder?
A. Navigate to the profile of each user and check the box for Manage Public Templates.
B. Navigate to the email templates and manually share each with the specific users.
C. Navigate to the email templates and manually share each with the Profile of the specific users.
D. Navigate to the user record and check the box for Manage Public Templates.

A

A. Navigate to the profile of each user and check the box for Manage Public Templates.

1144
Q

Ursa Major Solar utilizes Accounts in its Sales process; however, not all users have access to them. New users require Read access to Accounts. Additionally, four new users require Edit access.
What should an Administrator do to configure access for the new users?
A. Configure a profile to grant Account View access and a Permission Set to grant Account Edit access to specific users.
B. Configure a profile to grant Account Edit access and a Permission Set to restrict Read access to specific users.
C. Configure a sharing rule for Account View access and another sharing rule for Edit access to specific users.
D. Configure a Permission Set to grant Account Edit access to specific users and modify the Standard User profile.

A

A. Configure a profile to grant Account View access and a Permission Set to grant Account Edit access to specific users.

1145
Q

Ursa Major Solar’s support team currently has a very high call volume. They want to decrease this volume by creating a self-service community that will host published articles with Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs), and provide a chat with Help Desk representatives.
Which two features should be used to fulfill this goal? (Choose two.)
A. SOS
B. Knowledge
C. Content
D. Chat

A

B. Knowledge

D. Chat

1146
Q

At Ursa Major Solar, an Administrator has set up a new user.
The user needs to activate the account before the email link expires by default.
How long does the user have before the link expires?
A. 10 days
B. 14 days
C. 6 days
D. 7 days

A

D. 7 days

1147
Q

Ursa Major is onboarding 15 new employees in three weeks.
The Administrator needs to create user records in Salesforce without activating them.
Which two methods allow the Administrator to achieve this goal? (Choose two.)
A. Click Add Multiple Users and ensure that Generate New Password and Notify User Immediately are unchecked.
B. Create them with the User Import Wizard and ensure that Active is unchecked.
C. Schedule a Time-Dependent Workflow to create users in three weeks.
D. Create a .csv file ensuring that IsActive = False, and use the data loader to insert.

A

A. Click Add Multiple Users and ensure that Generate New Password and Notify User Immediately are unchecked.
D. Create a .csv file ensuring that IsActive = False, and use the data loader to insert.

1148
Q

Ursa Major Solar placed a time-dependent action in the workflow queue when the record was created.
What are two situations that will cause this action to be removed from the queue? (Choose two.)
A. If the action is deleted from the workflow queue
B. If another record triggers the same workflow rule
C. If the record no longer matches the rule criteria
D. If a validation rule is triggered for the record

A

A. If the action is deleted from the workflow queue

C. If the record no longer matches the rule criteria

1149
Q

What are two considerations for sharing email template folders? (Choose two.)
A. Sharing on Lightning email templates in inherited from the folder it is in.
B. Sharing a folder shares all subfolders in that folder.
C. Subfolders are shared separately from the parent folder.
D. Lightning email templates support packaging.

A

A. Sharing on Lightning email templates in inherited from the folder it is in.
B. Sharing a folder shares all subfolders in that folder.

1150
Q

Anytime an Opportunity is moved to Closed Won, Sales reps at Universal Containers (UC) are supposed to create a record on a child object of Opportunities called Survey Request.
This action, however, does not always occur. Sales reps do not always populate all fields correctly.
Which tool should be used to remove permissions from Sales to create these records and automate record creation (Choose 2 answers)?
A. Workflow
B. Flow
C. Process Builder
D. Approvals

A

B. Flow

C. Process Builder

1151
Q
In which two locations can a system administrator assign a page layout? (Choose two.)
A. Role
B. Profile
C. App
D. Record Type
A

B. Profile

D. Record Type

1152
Q

At Ursa Major Solar, Sales representatives use a custom report type for Account reports. New fields have been created on the Account Object.
An Administrator needs to report on the newly created fields.
What should the Administrator do to achieve this goal?
A. From the Custom Report Type, Edit Layout, then add the new fields to the report.
B. From the Custom Report Type, Edit Object Relationships, then add the new fields to the report.
C. Create a new account report and add the new fields from the Report Builder.
D. Create a new account report folder, go to share, and then add the new fields.

A

A. From the Custom Report Type, Edit Layout, then add the new fields to the report.

1153
Q

Ursa major Solar’s administrator needs to create a custom field to track a specific Tier 2 support user on a case record.
What is the appropriate data type to utilize when creating this custom field?
A. Hierarchical relationship
B. Lookup filter
C. Formula
D. Lookup relationship

A

D. Lookup relationship

1154
Q

After a recent restructure of its Sales Department, Ursa Major Solar is having issues with records being omitted in the new Opportunity Report.
Which three questions should the Administrator ask to research this issue? (Choose three.)
A. Do owners of all records have Roles and correct Territory Assignments?
B. Do the records the sales managers expect to see match the filter criteria?
C. Are records currently being shared with the sales manager?
D. Have the owners of the records been frozen?
E. Did the sales manager start from a copy or clone of an existing report?

A

A. Do owners of all records have Roles and correct Territory Assignments?
B. Do the records the sales managers expect to see match the filter criteria?
C. Are records currently being shared with the sales manager?

1155
Q
Which feature should Ursa Major Solar use if they want their support agents who are skilled in a particular product line to own cases directly after customers log them from an automated channel?
A. Assignment Rules
B. Workflow Field Update
C. Case Escalation Rules
D. Case Team Routing
A

A. Assignment Rules

1156
Q

A user at Ursa Major Solar attempts to log in to Salesforce from an IP address that is outside the login IP range on the user’s profile but within the organization- wide trusted IP range.
What occurs as a result of this scenario?
A. The user will be able to log in after the computer is activated.
B. The user will be unable to log in at all.
C. The user will be able to log in without activating the computer.
D. The user will be able to log in after answering one security question.

A

B. The user will be unable to log in at all.

1157
Q

An Administrator at Ursa Major Solar is converting a lead and needs to capture custom lead data on the converted contact.
What should the administrator do to accomplish this goal?
A. Utilize the lead conversion wizard to select the fields.
B. Utilize the data loader to move the custom lead data.
C. Map custom lead fields to custom contact fields.
D. Map custom lead fields to standard contact fields.

A

D. Map custom lead fields to standard contact fields.

1158
Q

What should an administrator take into consideration when creating Content tags?
A. Tags are case insensitive.
B. Tags combine singular and plural versions
C. Tags are updatable.
D. Tags are case sensitive.

A

A. Tags are case insensitive.

1159
Q

DreamHouse Realty uses Content to store files for Marketing collateral. The Marketing VP wants the Collateral_ID__c to be required and for the ID to contain a minimum of ten characters.
What should an administrator suggest to meet these requirements?
A. Validation Rules
B. Create Collateral_ID__c as a formula field.
C. Workflow Rules
D. Mark Collateral_ID__c as required on the page layout.

A

A. Validation Rules

1160
Q

Universal Containers (UC) acquired a new business and needs to import 65,000 new records into its Salesforce organization.
Which tool should the administrator use to accomplish this task?
A. Mass Transfer Records
B. Data Loader
C. Data Import Wizard
D. A third-party tool from the AppExchange

A

B. Data Loader

1161
Q

Sales Reps at Universal Containers want to prioritize and flag at-risk deals.
What feature should an administrator suggest to meet this requirement?
A. Einstein Opportunity Scoring
B. Einstein Lead Scoring
C. Einstein Activity Capture
D. Einstein Opportunity Insights

A

A. Einstein Opportunity Scoring

1162
Q
Ursa Major Solar uses data from the grand total of a custom report to create their dashboard. Which two components will populate the grand total properly?
(Choose two.)
A. Metric
B. Chart
C. Table
D. Gauge
A

A. Metric

D. Gauge

1163
Q

In which two ways can users access Salesforce from their mobile devices? (Choose two.)
A. Install Salesforce Connect for mobile.
B. Install the Salesforce mobile configuration.
C. Use the downloadable Salesforce mobile application.
D. Use the Lightning Experience in web browser.

A

C. Use the downloadable Salesforce mobile application.

D. Use the Lightning Experience in web browser.

1164
Q

Sales representatives at Ursa Major Solar are working on opportunities and need to see how their colleagues have effectively managed other opportunities with comparable products, competing against the same competitors.
Which two features should an administrator use to allow for this? (Choose two.)
A. Opportunity Dashboard
B. Big deal alerts
C. Opportunity update reminders
D. Chatter groups

A

A. Opportunity Dashboard

D. Chatter groups

1165
Q

Sales management at Ursa Major Solar wants to allow users to create new account records with prepopulated values.
Which feature should an administrator use to meet this requirement?
A. Default field values
B. A workflow rule
C. Formula fields
D. A custom button

A

A. Default field values

1166
Q

Sales executives at Ursa Major Solar (USM) frequently schedule virtual and remote meetings with key customer stakeholders.
USM wants to track activities for this meeting category to clearly display customer meetings in the account, contact, or opportunity page layouts, as well as adding this data to reports.
What should the administrator do to meet this goal?
A. Add a new value to the type field on tasks used for accounts, contacts, and opportunities.
B. Inform the user to manually enter the meeting details in the account comments.
C. Add a new value to the type field on accounts, contacts, and opportunities.
D. Inform the user to manually enter the meeting details in the description field on accounts, contacts, and opportunities.

A

A. Add a new value to the type field on tasks used for accounts, contacts, and opportunities.

1167
Q
Ursa Major Solar is experiencing quality assurance issues with a product line. An administrator needs to use a standard object to track the extent of the problem.
Which standard object should be used?
A. Case
B. Product
C. Opportunity
D. Account
A

A. Case

1168
Q

Ursa Major Solar wants all Sales Users to see a dashboard that displays Total Closed/Won Opportunity Amount by User on a monthly basis. The Opportunity sharing model is private.
What should the administrator do to fulfill this request?
A. Request for the Sales Manager to create the Dashboard from the Opportunities by User Report and save it to her private Dashboards Folder.
B. Create the Dashboard from the Opportunities by User Report, then save it in the shared Dashboard Folder as a Dynamic Dashboard.
C. Create the Dashboard from the Opportunities by User Report, choose the Sales Manager as RunAs User and Save in the private Dashboard Folder.
D. Request for the Sales Manager to create the Dashboard from the Opportunities by User Report, select “View Dashboard as Me”, and save in the shared Dashboard Folder.

A

B. Create the Dashboard from the Opportunities by User Report, then save it in the shared Dashboard Folder as a Dynamic Dashboard.

1169
Q

Universal Containers wants to create a new sales team that focuses exclusively on small to medium business customers. This group will track information with the same fields and picklist values but will need two new options on the stage field.
How should the administrator accomplish this task?
A. Create a new record type.
B. Create a new sales process.
C. Create a new record type and sales process.
D. Create a new record type and page layout.

A

C. Create a new record type and sales process.

1170
Q
Ursa Major Solar wants to ensure that unique data is always input into a specific field. Which two field properties should the administrator configure? (Choose two.)
A. Default Value
B. Unique
C. Required
D. Data Type
A

B. Unique

C. Required

1171
Q

Ursa Major Solar is a Canadian company that has the following set up in Salesforce:
✑ They have activated Web-to-Case on their corporate website.
✑ Auto-Response is configured so that customers are thanked for logging the case and activated Assignment Rules based on the province (CANADA) in which the customer resides.
✑ Case ownership is therefore determined and routed to the corresponding queue `” North, South, East, or West.
Customer Cases that do NOT meet the existing criteria need to be assigned to Queue World.
Which solution will satisfy this requirement?
A. Using a Workflow Rule, change the owner of new Cases outside CANADA to Queue World.
B. Using a Trigger, change the owner of Cases outside CANADA to Queue World.
C. In an Active Case Flow, change the name of the Queue to World.
D. In Case Support Settings, change Default Case Owner to Queue World.

A

D. In Case Support Settings, change Default Case Owner to Queue World.

1172
Q

The administrator at Ursa Major Solar has just finished creating new hot Account reports that filter Accounts that were modified this year with a rating of hot. The report was shared with the entire sales team. Some users are seeing some Accounts that have NOT been modified since last year and other Accounts where the rating is cold.
What should the administrator do to ensure that the report works as intended for all users?
A. Create a filter using bucketing.
B. Create the report in a private folder.
C. Lock the report filters.
D. Use a cross-object filter.

A

A. Create a filter using bucketing.

1173
Q

The Ursa Major Solar administrator is editing the page layout for a new custom object. A text area field is accidentally removed from the page layout, and it needs to be restored to the page layout.
What are three methods for achieving this goal? (Choose three.)
A. From the fields palette, drag the field into the same position.
B. Click the undo button or the cancel button.
C. Restore original page layout from a sandbox.
D. Clone the layout from a different profile and use save as.
E. Restore from the recycle bin within 15 days.

A

A. From the fields palette, drag the field into the same position.
B. Click the undo button or the cancel button.
C. Restore original page layout from a sandbox.

1174
Q

Users at Universal Containers (UC) adhere to the following process for expense reports:
✑ Create the expense report.
✑ Attach receipts in an Expenses app.
✑ Send the report to the accountant to review and approve.
An administrator needs to enable this app for Salesforce Mobile.
What should you administrator consider from the User’s perspective?
A. A user can create list views, attach receipts as photos, and submit records for approval.
B. A user can create records, attach receipts as photos, and submit for approval.
C. A user can search Salesforce Records, attach receipts as photos, and approve records from Chatter.
D. A user can utilize Search, create list views, and receive record push notifications from Chatter.

A

B. A user can create records, attach receipts as photos, and submit for approval.

1175
Q

What are the defaults for Org Wide Default (OWD) and Profile permissions for all Profiles that have View All Data or Modify All Data disabled on a custom object?
A. Private for OWD and CRED for Profiles
B. Public Read/Write for OWD and CRED for Profiles
C. Private for OWD and No Access for Profiles
D. Public Read/Write for OWD and No Access for Profiles

A

D. Public Read/Write for OWD and No Access for Profiles

1176
Q

Northern Trail Outfitters has web form for cases.
If the case assignment rules are inactive, who will be assigned ownership when the case is created?
A. The system administrator will be assigned.
B. The case will be assigned to a default case queue.
C. The case will be assigned to the default workflow user.
D. The default case owner will be assigned.

A

D. The default case owner will be assigned.

1177
Q
Ursa Major Solar has an existing process for their solar panel Opportunities that include the following stages:
✑ Prospecting
✑ Value Proposition
✑ Negotiation/Review
✑ Closed Won
✑ Closed Lost
They want to implement a new process for their battery Opportunities using the following stages:
✑ Qualification
✑ Value Proposition
✑ Negotiation/Review
✑ Closed Won
✑ Closed Lost

What should the administrator configure to implement these changes?
A. Update the existing Opportunity sales process to include qualification as a valid stage.
B. Create a new battery record type on Opportunity and add the appropriate values to the stage picklist.
C. Create a new sales process that includes the relevant stages and assign it to the new battery record type on Opportunity.
D. Edit the stage field on Opportunity and activate qualification as a value.

A

C. Create a new sales process that includes the relevant stages and assign it to the new battery record type on Opportunity.

1178
Q

A new custom object called Parts has been created for Ursa Major Solar.
Where should an administrator adjust how the object appears when it is found in the global search?
A. Object manager, parts, and search layouts
B. Object manager, parts, and page layouts
C. Global search, parts, and search layouts
D. Global search, parts, and global search Layouts

A

A. Object manager, parts, and search layouts

1179
Q

Supervisors at Universal Containers have read access to Contacts through their profiles. Sales reps have a separate profile them to edit Contacts. Some sales reps are attending a conference for a week and supervisors will need to fill in to update Contact details while they are out.
How should an administrator grant proper access to the supervisors?
A. Assign a permission set with the edit permission on Contact to the supervisors that need it.
B. Create a sharing rule to grant read/write access on Contact to the supervisor role.
C. Update the supervisor profile with edit permission on Contact.
D. Change the supervisor users’ profiles to be sales rep.

A

B. Create a sharing rule to grant read/write access on Contact to the supervisor role.

1180
Q

Ursa Major Solar wants to upload 10,000 Campaigns to Salesforce.
Which tool should the administrator utilize to accomplish this task?
A. Data Import Wizard
B. Data Loader
C. Bulk Data Load Jobs
D. AppExchange package

A

B. Data Loader

1181
Q

Ursa Major (UM) is using an approval process.
Which two statements are correct about this scenario? (Choose two.)
A. A delegated approver can reassign approval requests.
B. To track the process, UM can use the approval history related list.
C. An approval action defines the result of record approval or rejection.
D. UM can use an assignment rule to define the approver for each step in the process.

A

B. To track the process, UM can use the approval history related list.
C. An approval action defines the result of record approval or rejection.

1182
Q

At Cloud Kicks, new public articles must be approved before publishing. Users are asked to click the submit for approval button to begin the process but sometimes the user forgets.
How should an administrator automate submission so all new public articles will enter the approval process?
A. Default the Submit for Approval button
B. Create a new record type and page layout
C. Use Process Builder
D. Update Initial Actions

A

A. Default the Submit for Approval button

1183
Q

Ursa Major Solar is setting up case assignment rules.
What are two places where the cases can be assigned? (Choose two.)
A. Profile
B. User
C. Queue
D. Contact

A

B. User

C. Queue

1184
Q
Ursa Major Solar wants to customize Activities (tasks and events). What are three types of customization that occur? (Choose three.)
A. Workflow Rules
B. Field Tracking
C. Assignment Rules
D. Validation Rules
E. Custom Fields
A

A. Workflow Rules
D. Validation Rules
E. Custom Fields

1185
Q

Ursa Major Solar recently purchased 15 new Salesforce licenses.
How many users can an administrator create at the same time on the Add Multiple Users page?
A. An unlimited number of users.
B. A maximum of 5 users.
C. A maximum of 15 users.
D. A maximum of 10 users.

A

D. A maximum of 10 users.

1186
Q

Universal Containers introduced a new product and wants to track all associated cases that get logged. They are looking for an automated solution that would give the product’s two lead engineers read/write access to all new cases that reference the new product.
What should an administrator do to satisfy this requirement?
A. Create an auto-response rule and a public group.
B. Create a predefined case team and an assignment rule.
C. Create a user-based sharing rule and an ad-hoc case team.
D. Create a queue and a criteria-based sharing rule.

A

B. Create a predefined case team and an assignment rule.

1187
Q

An administrator for Ursa Major Solar wants to allow internal users to view a dashboard as a Sales Manager within a given sales region.
How can this be configured?
A. Create a dashboard with multiple components.
B. Create a dashboard to run as a specified user.
C. Create a dashboard to run as the logged-in user.
D. Create a dashboard for all opportunities in the region.

A

B. Create a dashboard to run as a specified user.

1188
Q

Universal Containers created a new job posting on the first of the month. It triggered a process scheduled action that will send a Chatter post to the department VP th in 30 days if the position is still open and the status is NOT equal to Interviewing. On the 10 of the month, an application interviews, and the job posting status is updated to Interviewing.
What will happen to the Chatter post in this situation?
A. The pending Chatter post will be sent in 30 days.
B. The pending Chatter post will be canceled.
C. The pending Chatter post will be paused.
D. The pending Chatter post will be sent on the 10 th of the month.

A

A. The pending Chatter post will be sent in 30 days.

1189
Q

A new approval process is being adapted by Ursa Major Solar. After an opportunity has been approved, the contract is sent to the customer for signature as the final step in that process.
How can the administrator implement this functionality?
A. Use the Salesforce Autosign flow.
B. Install an app from the AppExchange.
C. Check the ‘Send PDF’ box on the approval process setup.
D. Hire a consulting firm to develop a document signing workflow.

A

B. Install an app from the AppExchange.

1190
Q

Universal Containers is using lead assignment rules and record types. The sales team has the record type ˜Corporate Leads' assigned as their default record type. The sales team has reported that Leads assigned to them are assigned to a different record type. They have requested to have all Leads assigned to them be assigned to the ‘Corporate Leads’ record type.
How should an administrator configure the sales team’s request?
A. Select override the existing record type with the assignee’s default record type in Lead conversion settings.
B. Select preserve lead status in Lead conversion settings.
C. Select keep the existing record type in Lead conversion settings.
D. Select require validation for converted Leads in Lead conversion settings.

A

A. Select override the existing record type with the assignee’s default record type in Lead conversion settings.

1191
Q

Ursa Major Solar is using products and price books.
Which two items should an Admin take into considerations about these features? (Choose two.)
A. The standard and list price for a product can be listed in more than one currency.
B. A product can have a different list price in different price books.
C. If price books contain assets, they can NOT contain products.
D. Products without a price are automatically added to the standard price book.

A

A. The standard and list price for a product can be listed in more than one currency.
B. A product can have a different list price in different price books.

1192
Q

Ursa Major Solar customers are starting to request custom-sized solar panels, which are currently unavailable in the standard inventory. Management has decided to add custom sizing as an add-on item in Salesforce.
The administrator needs to allow sales users to add custom sizing to the total opportunity sale.
What should the administrator do to achieve this goal?
A. Add custom sizing as a new product in a pricebook.
B. Make a new custom object related to opportunities for custom sizing.
C. Add custom sizing as a new product in an order.
D. Add a new field on the opportunity labeled custom sizing.

A

D. Add a new field on the opportunity labeled custom sizing.

1193
Q

The VP of Marketing wants Sales Reps to get updates when materials are updated in the Marketing library.
What feature should an Administrator recommend?
A. Validation rule
B. Approval process
C. Email alert
D. Subscribe

A

D. Subscribe

1194
Q

Ursa Major Solar recently enabled the multiple currencies feature.
As a result, which currency will be used as the foundation for all currency conversion rates?
A. Record currency
B. Corporate currency
C. Active currency
D. Personal currency

A

B. Corporate currency

1195
Q

Universal Containers wants to set up a customer service community where existing and potential customers can view public discussions, collaborate with other members, and search for solutions posted by other members without logging into the community.
How should an administrator allow access to the community?
A. Set up self-registration for the community
B. Use the community’s guest user profile
C. Use LinkedIn or Facebook as authentication providers
D. Create a custom community profile

A

B. Use the community’s guest user profile

1196
Q

Northern Trail Outfitters has two sales groups. Each group has its own unique sales process. Management wants to ensure that the sales groups see their relevant sales process when working on opportunities.
How should an administrator meet this requirement?
A. Page Layouts
B. Enable Paths
C. Opportunity Teams
D. Record types

A

D. Record types

1197
Q

High Priority cases at Ursa Major Solar need to get a response in less than 3 hours or escalated to a queue called High Priority Queue.
An administrator needs to configure the case management process to implement this requirement.
How should the administrator achieve this goal?
A. Create a case milestone to assign all cases where status = high to the high priority queue based on the last modification time and set the age over to 3 (hours).
B. Create an escalation rule to assign all cases where status = high to the high priority queue based on when the case is created.
C. Create an escalation rule to assign all cases where status = high to the high priority queue based on the last modification time and set the age over to 3 (hours).
D. Create an assignment rule to assign all cases where status = high to the high priority queue.

A

C. Create an escalation rule to assign all cases where status = high to the high priority queue based on the last modification time and set the age over to 3 (hours).

1198
Q

Northern Trail Outfitters wants to backup administrator set up for their org. Once the administrator is set up, they report that they are unable to perform any of the administrative duties.
What are two possible reasons for the access issues? (Choose two.)
A. The role needs to be specified on the user record.
B. The System Administrator profile is unavailable under the Salesforce Platform license.
C. The active checkbox is unchecked by default.
D. The user was given the delegated administrator group access.

A

A. The role needs to be specified on the user record.

B. The System Administrator profile is unavailable under the Salesforce Platform license.

1199
Q

Ursa Major Solar has the following process regarding its opportunities:
✑ There are three different lines of business (Widget A, Widget B, Widget C) that each contain fields specific so that line of business’s industry and customers.
✑ For each line of business, there is a specific set of fields that Sales users should see and a different set of fields that Marketing users should see.
An Administrator needs to configure Page Layouts and Record Types for the Opportunity object so that each team sees what it needs to see, without cluttered layouts containing unnecessary fields.
What should the Administrator do to accomplish this goal?
A. Create one Record Type with six Page Layouts (Marketing Widget A, Marketing Widget B, Marketing Widget C, Sales Widget A, Sales Widget B, and Sales Widget C).
B. Create six Record Types (Sales Widget A, Sales Widget B, Sales Widget C, Marketing Widget A, Marketing Widget B, and Marketing Widget C) with one Page Layout.
C. Create six Record Types (Marketing Widget A, Marketing Widget B, Marketing Widget C, Sales Widget A, Sales Widget B, and Sales Widget C) with six total Page Layouts, one for each Record Type.
D. Create three Record Types (Widget A, Widget B, Widget C) with six Page Layouts (Sales Widget A, Sales Widget B, Sales Widget C, Marketing Widget A, Marketing Widget B, and Marketing Widget C).

A

D. Create three Record Types (Widget A, Widget B, Widget C) with six Page Layouts (Sales Widget A, Sales Widget B, Sales Widget C, Marketing Widget A, Marketing Widget B, and Marketing Widget C).

1200
Q

The District Sales Director at Cloud Kicks wants to share the leaderboard component on his dashboard with his sales team.
What two actions should an administrator take to enable this functionality? (Choose two.)
A. Enable Opportunity Teams
B. Build a Reporting Snapshot
C. Turn on Chatter Feed Tracking for Dashboards
D. Create a Chatter group for the Sales Team.

A

B. Build a Reporting Snapshot

C. Turn on Chatter Feed Tracking for Dashboards

1201
Q

A sales ops user has been identified as the dashboards expert within Cloud Kicks. This user needs to be able to update dashboard folder access for all non- private folders.
Which permission should the administrator assign to the user?
A. Manage reports in public folders
B. Create and customize dashboards
C. Manage dashboards in public folders
D. Create dashboard folders

A

C. Manage dashboards in public folders

1202
Q
Which three objects can be added as Campaigns Members? (Choose three.)
A. Person Accounts
B. Leads
C. Contacts
D. Accounts
E. Individuals
A

A. Person Accounts
B. Leads
C. Contacts

1203
Q

What are two considerations when activating and assigning Themes and Branding? (Choose two.)
A. Each profile can be applied to a different Theme.
B. Up to 300 custom Themes can be created per org.
C. Only one Theme can be applied in an org at a time.
D. Themes apply to both Lightning Experience and mobile.

A

B. Up to 300 custom Themes can be created per org.

D. Themes apply to both Lightning Experience and mobile.

1204
Q

The sales operations team at Universal Containers purchased a list of shipping companies they would like to be imported into the Salesforce org using the Data
Import Wizard. Some companies on the list may already be customers.
Which fields should the administrator use to prevent duplicates when importing these Account records?
A. Owner Name and Account Name.
B. Account Name and Account Site.
C. Account Name and Created Date.
D. Account Name and Billing Address.

A

B. Account Name and Account Site.

1205
Q

Ursa Major Solar (UMS) is using the workflow field update.
Which two actions can UMS complete with this feature? (Choose two.)
A. Modify the record type of a record.
B. Update the values of a field on a child object.
C. Choose a formula field for a field update.
D. Apply a specific value to a field.

A

A. Modify the record type of a record.

C. Choose a formula field for a field update.

1206
Q

A user with administrator privileges accidentally deleted a custom field in an org one day ago.
What should the administrator consider to restore the field?
A. The deleted field and its data can be restored up to 30 days after deletion.
B. The deleted field can be restored up to 15 days after deletion, but all data will be lost.
C. The deleted fields and its data CANNOT be restored.
D. The deleted field and its data can be restored up to 15 days after deletion.

A

D. The deleted field and its data can be restored up to 15 days after deletion.

1207
Q

When a Salesforce user is deactivated, what happens to all of the records the user owns in Salesforce?
A. They are automatically assigned to another user.
B. They are assigned to the deactivated user until reassigned
C. They are automatically deleted.
D. They are automatically assigned to the administrator.

A

B. They are assigned to the deactivated user until reassigned

1208
Q

Ursa Major Solar needs to fulfill the following requirements:
✑ A custom object must be created to capture account survey data.
✑ Users need the ability to select an account from the survey record and view related surveys on the account record.
Which two actions can an administrator configure to meet these requirements? (Choose two.)
A. Create a lookup relationship field on the account object.
B. Put the account related list on the survey page layout.
C. Create a lookup relationship field on the survey object.
D. Put the survey related list on the account page layout.

A

B. Put the account related list on the survey page layout.

C. Create a lookup relationship field on the survey object.

1209
Q

The VP of Sales at Northern Trail Outfitters requested a new value be added to the opportunity stage. The administrator added this new picklist value to the stage field but found that the new value was not available to users.
How should the administrator troubleshoot this issue?
A. Ensure the stage probability value is set.
B. Add the new value to the appropriate record type.
C. Mark the new value as active in the record type.
D. Assign the new value to the appropriate sales process.

A

D. Assign the new value to the appropriate sales process.

1210
Q

An administrator at Northern Trail Outfitters is creating new record types for a custom object.
What should the administrator take into consideration?
A. Assign the record type to the appropriate profiles.
B. Set the field-level security for the record type.
C. Create a new page layout for the record type.
D. Add the record type to the required path.

A

A. Assign the record type to the appropriate profiles.